Contents

Xerox Creo CXP3535 Server User Guide PDF

1 of 538
1 of 538

Summary of Content for Xerox Creo CXP3535 Server User Guide PDF

www.creo.com

User Guide English

CXP3535 Color Server for DocuColor 3535 version 1.0

653-00561A-EN

CXP3535 Color Server for DocuColor 3535

version 1.0

User Guide

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Copyright Copyright 2002 Creo Inc. All rights reserved.

No copying, distribution, publication, modification, or incorporation of this document, in whole or part, is permitted without the express written permission of Creo. In the event of any permitted copying, distribution, publication, modification, or incorporation of this document, no changes in or deletion of author attribution, trademark legend, or copyright notice shall be made.

No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, published, used for commercial exploitation, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the express written permission of Creo Inc.

This document is also distributed in Adobe Systems Incorporated's PDF (Portable Document Format). You may reproduce the document from the PDF file for internal use. Copies produced from the PDF file must be reproduced in whole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trademarks The Creo wordmark, Creo logo, and the names of the Creo products and services referred to in this document are trademarks of Creo Inc.

Adobe, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo and PDF are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc., and are registered in the US Patents and Trademark Office and may be registered in other jurisdictions.

Apple, AppleTalk, AppleShare, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, and Laserwriter are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.

Microsoft, Microsoft Windows NT, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows 98, Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows ME and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp.

Xerox is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp.

Other brand or product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FCC Compliance The Creo equipment referred to in this document complies with the requirements in Part 15 of FCC Rules for a Class A computing device. Operation of the Creo equipment in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception, requiring the operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Limitation of Liability The product, software or services are being provided on an "as is" and "as available" basis. Except as may be stated specifically in your contract, Creo Inc. expressly disclaims all warranties of any kind, whether express or implied, including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and non- infringement.

You understand and agree that Creo Inc. shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, consequential or exemplary damages, including but not limited to, damages for loss of profits, goodwill, use, data or other intangible losses (even if Creo has been advised of the possibility of such damages), resulting from: (i) the use or the inability to use the product or software; (ii) the cost of procurement of substitute goods and services resulting from any products, goods, data, software, information or services purchased; (iii) unauthorized access to or alteration of your products, software or data; (iv) statements or conduct of any third party; (v) any other matter relating to the product, software, or services.

The text and drawings herein are for illustration and reference only. The specifications on which they are based are subject to change. Creo Inc. may, at any time and without notice, make changes to this document. Creo Inc., for itself and on behalf of its subsidiaries, assumes no liability for technical or editorial errors or omissions made herein, and shall not be liable for incidental, consequential, indirect, or special damages, including, without limitation, loss of use, loss or alteration of data, delays, or lost profits or savings arising from the use of this document. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Patents This product is covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents:

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creo Inc. 3700 Gilmore Way Burnaby, B.C., Canada V5G 4M1 Tel: 1-604-451-2700 Fax: 1-604-437-9891

http://www.creo.com .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

653-00561A-EN

June 26, 2003

RE37,376 4,456,924 4,500,919 4,558,302 4,743,091 4,992,864 5,049,901 5,079,721 5,081,617 5,103,407 5,111,308 5,113,249 5,122,871 5,124,547 5,132,723 5,150,225 5,153,769 5,155,782 5,157,516 5,208,818 5,208,888 5,247,174 5,249,067

5,283,140 5,291,273 5,323,248 5,325,217 5,339,176 5,343,059 5,355,446 5,359,451 5,359,458 5,367,360 5,384,648 5,384,899 5,412,491 5,412,737 5,420,702 5,420,722 5,459,505 5,473,733 5,481,379 5,488,906 5,497,252 5,508,828 5,509,561

5,517,359 5,519,852 5,526,143 5,532,728 5,561,691 5,568,595 5,576,754 5,579,115 5,592,309 5,594,556 5,600,448 5,608,822 5,615,282 5,625,766 5,636,330 5,649,220 5,650,076 5,652,804 5,680,129 5,691,823 5,691,828 5,696,393 5,699,174

5,699,740 5,708,736 5,713,287 5,742,743 5,764,374 5,764,381 5,771,794 5,785,309 5,802,034 5,813,346 5,818,498 5,854,883 5,861,904 5,861,992 5,875,288 5,894,342 5,900,981 5,934,196 5,942,137 5,946,426 5,947,028 5,958,647 5,966,504

5,969,872 5,973,801 5,986,819 5,995,475 5,996,499 5,998,067 6,003,442 6,014,471 6,016,752 6,031,932 6,043,865 6,060,208 6,063,528 6,063,546 6,072,518 6,090,529 6,096,461 6,098,544 6,107,011 6,112,663 6,115,056 6,121,996 6,130,702

6,134,393 6,136,509 6,137,580 6,147,789 6,158,345 6,159,659 6,164,637 6,180,325 6,181,362 6,181,439 6,186,068 6,189,452 6,191,882 6,204,874 6,208,369 6,214,276 6,217,965 6,252,522 6,260,482 6,266,080 6,266,134 6,267,054 6,268,948

6,283,589 6,295,076 6,299,572 6,318,266 6,340,817 6,352,816 6,353,216 6,366,339 6,371,026 6,377,739 6,387,597 6,396,422 6,396,618 6,407,849 6,414,755 6,422,801 6,435,091

Environment Management System (EMS)

EMS Overview

Creo is committed to the Environment Management System (EMS). According to this policy, we are committed to keeping customers and service engineers informed about the principles of handling company products with an emphasis on environmental conservation.

The Triple-R principles are reduce, reuse, and recycle.

Any item that can be recycled should be recycled and any item that can be reused should be reused, to reduce the quantities of trash that municipalities must handle.

Recycling

Used items such as paper, plastic, electronic parts, and glass should be sent for recycling.

Packaging Materials

Packaging materials will be kept at the customers premises. For disposal, they should be sent to a plant for paper, carton, and wood recycling.

End of Product Life

When the product reaches its end of life, it should be sent for recycling to a recognized company in each country.

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

1 Welcome 1 Welcome to the CXP3535 Color Server User Guide .................................................................................. 2 User Guide Purpose .................................................................................................................................. 2 Who Should Use This Guide ..................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Content and Description ............................................................................................................. 3 Product Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 4

Composition...................................................................................................................................... 6 Features............................................................................................................................................. 6 Supported Formats .......................................................................................................................... 10 Workflow ........................................................................................................................................ 10 Data Flow ........................................................................................................................................ 12 CXP3535 Color Server Network Printers........................................................................................... 13

2 Getting Started 15 Powering Up .......................................................................................................................................... 16

CXP3535 Color Server in the Start Menu ......................................................................................... 16 Test Page................................................................................................................................................ 17 The CXP3535 Color Server Workspace ................................................................................................... 19

Workspace Items ............................................................................................................................. 20 Shut Down and Power Off...................................................................................................................... 29

3 Setting Up Client Workstations 31 Default Network Printers on PC and Macintosh Clients ........................................................................... 32 Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations .......................................................................................... 33

Defining a Printer - Windows NT 4.0................................................................................................ 33 Defining a Printer - Windows 98 ...................................................................................................... 35 Defining a Printer - Windows 2000 and ME ..................................................................................... 38 Defining a Printer - Windows XP ...................................................................................................... 42 Creating PostScript Files on the PC................................................................................................... 46 Copying PPD from PC ...................................................................................................................... 55 Printing from a PC ........................................................................................................................... 55

Defining a Printer on Macintosh Client Workstations .............................................................................. 57 Setting the Network Printer for Macintosh OS 9............................................................................... 57 Setting the Network Printer for Macintosh OS X (10.2) .................................................................... 59 Printing from a Macintosh ............................................................................................................... 63

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server ........................................................................................... 65 Setting up an LPR Printer in Windows NT 4.0 ................................................................................... 65 Setting up an LPR Printer in Windows 2000/XP ................................................................................ 72 Windows NT/2000/XP Command Line ............................................................................................. 80 Setting up an LPR Printer in Macintosh OS X (10.2) .......................................................................... 81 Setting up an LPR printer in Mac OS 9 (using the Choose Spire Over IP utility) .................................. 86

Contents

viii CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

Printing from Linux .......................................................................................................................... 94 Defining a Printer on Unix Client Workstations ................................................................................ 98

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration ...................................................................................................... 99 Defining Novell NDS Printer Queues in the Novell NDS Tree ........................................................... 100 Configuring IPX Printing ................................................................................................................ 114 Installing the Printer Drivers on a Novell Client Using the Adobe PS Application ............................. 116 Defining the CXP3535 Color Server as a Novell NDS Client ............................................................ 117

4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server 121 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 122 Printing from the CXP3535 Color Server............................................................................................... 122

Importing Files............................................................................................................................... 122 Reprinting Files .............................................................................................................................. 124

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server ........................................................................... 126 Job Parameters Window ................................................................................................................ 126 The Print Settings Tab.................................................................................................................... 128 The Paper Stock Tab ...................................................................................................................... 140 The Print Quality Tab ..................................................................................................................... 144 The Color Tab................................................................................................................................ 152 The Imposition Tab ........................................................................................................................ 168 The Services Tab ............................................................................................................................ 188 The Finishing Tab........................................................................................................................... 200 Slip Sheet ...................................................................................................................................... 203 The Exception Tab ......................................................................................................................... 214

Adjusting Job Parameters Post-RIP ........................................................................................................ 221

5 Working from the Client Workstation 223 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 224 Printing from Client Workstations......................................................................................................... 224

Using Hot Folders .......................................................................................................................... 225 Setting PPD Parameters from Client Workstations................................................................................. 232

PPD Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 232 Spire Web Center ................................................................................................................................. 240

The Web Viewer............................................................................................................................ 241 Downloads .................................................................................................................................... 246 Links.............................................................................................................................................. 247

6 Workflows & Tools 249 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 250 High-Resolution (APR) Workflow .......................................................................................................... 250

APR (Automatic Picture Replacement) ............................................................................................ 251 OPI (Open Prepress Interface)......................................................................................................... 252 APR and OPI File Formats............................................................................................................... 252 Setting the High-Resolution File Path ............................................................................................. 252

Contents ix

Preparing to Print Using APR or OPI ............................................................................................... 254 Printing with APR or OPI ................................................................................................................ 255 Organizing High-Resolution Files.................................................................................................... 256 Sample Job: Printing a Brochure Using the APR Workflow.............................................................. 256

VI (Variable Information) Workflow....................................................................................................... 257 Using Creo Variable Print Specification to Print a VI Job ................................................................. 259 VI Document Formats .................................................................................................................... 259 Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) ........................................................................................... 262 Organizing VI Elements.................................................................................................................. 264 CXP3535 Color Server Job Parameters and VI Jobs......................................................................... 264

Imposition Workflow ............................................................................................................................ 266 Editing Imposition Jobs .................................................................................................................. 267

Color Workflow.................................................................................................................................... 268 CXP3535 Color Server Color Formats............................................................................................. 268 The Gradation Tool........................................................................................................................ 269 The Calibration Tool ...................................................................................................................... 281 The Spot Color Editor .................................................................................................................... 307

PDF Workflow ...................................................................................................................................... 311 Export as PDF2Go .......................................................................................................................... 314 PDF Optimization........................................................................................................................... 315

Printing PrePress Files - Graphic Art Port (GAP)...................................................................................... 315 Importing GAP Files ....................................................................................................................... 315 Supporting Graphic Arts Port (GAP) Files........................................................................................ 316 Gap File Structure .......................................................................................................................... 316

Scan Back Workflow............................................................................................................................. 317

7 Managing Jobs 319 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 320 Queue Manager ................................................................................................................................... 320

The In Process Queue..................................................................................................................... 322 The In Print Queue......................................................................................................................... 323 Queue Manager Status Panel Information...................................................................................... 325 Job Batching Workflow.................................................................................................................. 326 Reordering Jobs in Queues............................................................................................................. 327 Suspending and Resuming Queues ................................................................................................ 328 Handling Jobs in Queues................................................................................................................ 328 Aborting a Running Job ................................................................................................................. 329 Moving Waiting Jobs to Storage .................................................................................................... 330 Deleting Jobs ................................................................................................................................. 331 Viewing and Editing the Job Parameters ........................................................................................ 332

Storage Folder ...................................................................................................................................... 332 Storage Folder Status Panel Information......................................................................................... 334 Handling Jobs in the Storage Folder ............................................................................................... 334 Submitting Jobs ............................................................................................................................. 335 Duplicating Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 335 Archiving and Retrieving Jobs ........................................................................................................ 336

x CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

Viewing the Job History ................................................................................................................. 339 Filtering the List ............................................................................................................................. 339

Export a Job as InSite............................................................................................................................ 348 Job Preview & Editor............................................................................................................................. 349

The Job Editor Tabs ....................................................................................................................... 350 The Job Editor Buttons................................................................................................................... 353 Viewing Pages in the Job Editor ..................................................................................................... 354 Editing RTP Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 359 Previewing and Editing PDL Jobs.................................................................................................... 367

Job Ticket Report.................................................................................................................................. 368 Thumbnail Window.............................................................................................................................. 370 Managing Disk Space ........................................................................................................................... 371

8 Administering the System 373 The Administration Window................................................................................................................. 374 General Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 375

Changing the Server Name............................................................................................................ 376 Changing the Date & Time ............................................................................................................ 378 Selecting the User Interface Language ........................................................................................... 379 Setting the Default Unit of Measurement ...................................................................................... 380 Enable Test Page ........................................................................................................................... 381

Resource Manager ............................................................................................................................... 382 Virtual Printers............................................................................................................................... 382 Fonts ............................................................................................................................................. 386 High-Res........................................................................................................................................ 396 VI Elements ................................................................................................................................... 397 Profile Manager............................................................................................................................. 399 User Defined Imposition Template ................................................................................................. 406

Network Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 408 IPX Printing.................................................................................................................................... 409 TCP/IP Setup.................................................................................................................................. 411 AppleTalk Setup ............................................................................................................................ 412

Preferences .......................................................................................................................................... 413 Color - Spire Spot Color Dictionary ................................................................................................ 414 Color - Calibration Methods .......................................................................................................... 415 Color - Emulations......................................................................................................................... 416 Accounting/Message Viewer Log Setup ......................................................................................... 418 System Disks.................................................................................................................................. 419 Alert Messages .............................................................................................................................. 419 Pre-RIP Preview.............................................................................................................................. 420 Default Archiving Path................................................................................................................... 421 PDF Optimization........................................................................................................................... 422 OPI ................................................................................................................................................ 422 Default Paper Size ......................................................................................................................... 423 Print Queue Manager .................................................................................................................... 425 Remote Tools Setup....................................................................................................................... 426

Contents xi

ATS ............................................................................................................................................... 431 Utilities ................................................................................................................................................. 432

View Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 432 Configuration Backup and Restore................................................................................................. 435

9 Job Accounting 439 Job Accounting Overview ..................................................................................................................... 440

Viewing the Accounting Information ............................................................................................. 440 Managing the Accounting Information ................................................................................................. 442

Reordering Columns ...................................................................................................................... 442 Resizing Columns .......................................................................................................................... 443 Filtering the Information by Date ................................................................................................... 444 Sorting the Information ................................................................................................................. 445

Accounting / Message Viewer Log Setup .............................................................................................. 446 Exporting the Accounting Report.......................................................................................................... 446 Printing the Accounting Report............................................................................................................. 447

10 System Messages 449 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 450 The Alerts Window............................................................................................................................... 450

System Disks Threshold Message ................................................................................................... 451 Job History ........................................................................................................................................... 452 The Message Viewer............................................................................................................................. 454 Managing Messages............................................................................................................................. 455

Reordering Columns ...................................................................................................................... 455 Resizing Columns .......................................................................................................................... 455 Filtering the Messages by Type....................................................................................................... 456 Sorting the Message List ................................................................................................................ 457 Printing the Message List ............................................................................................................... 457

Pop-up Messages ................................................................................................................................. 458

A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server 459 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 460 Reinstalling the Operating System......................................................................................................... 462 Reinstalling the Creo Application .......................................................................................................... 464 The Configuration Wizard (If configuration backup is available) ............................................................ 468

Restoring the Backed Up Configuration ......................................................................................... 468 Restoring the Factory Defaults Configuration ................................................................................. 473

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) ................................................................. 476 Choosing the Configuration Type .................................................................................................. 476 Setting the Language..................................................................................................................... 477 Configuring the Host Name ........................................................................................................... 478 Setting the Date and Time ............................................................................................................. 481 Setting the Default Measurement Units ......................................................................................... 483

xii CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

Configuring the IP Address ............................................................................................................ 484 Configuring the Apple Talk Zone ................................................................................................... 486 Completing the Configuration....................................................................................................... 488 Changing the Operator Name and Password ................................................................................. 491 Installing and Configuring Novell Client for Spire ........................................................................... 492 Configuring the McAfee VirusScan ................................................................................................ 496 Importing a File and Performing a Test Print................................................................................... 503 Shutting Down and Powering Off.................................................................................................. 503

Glossary 505

Index 517

Welcome

Welcome to the CXP3535 Color Server User Guide .............................2

User Guide Purpose ............................................................................2

Who Should Use This Guide................................................................2

Chapter Content and Description........................................................3

Product Overview................................................................................4

2 Chapter 1 Welcome

Welcome to the CXP3535 Color Server User Guide Welcome to your CXP3535 Color Server User Guide.

The CXP3535 Color Server is a powerful, comprehensive color server providing high throughput and print predictability to digital workflows. In combination with the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer, the CXP3535 Color Server effectively addresses the growth of on-demand printing needs and delivers the best output quality available.

Throughout this guide, we look forward to supporting you all the way from first time setup and configuration to print.

User Guide Purpose This user guide will help you operate the CXP3535 Color Server. It can also be used as a reference guide for questions or procedures. Study this user guide to take full advantage of the many unique and advanced features of the CXP3535 Color Server.

Who Should Use This Guide This user guide is for CXP3535 Color Server operators and system administrators. This guide explains how you can quickly and easily print from the CXP3535 Color Server or from a client workstation. Step-by-step procedures are included for new and occasional CXP3535 Color Server users. Detailed information is provided for users who require in-depth knowledge of the CXP3535 Color Server.

Chapter Content and Description 3

Chapter Content and Description

Chapter Contents Description

Chapter 1 Welcome This chapter introduces the guide and the CXP3535 Color Server features and workflows.

Chapter 2 Getting Started This chapter explains how to power up the CXP3535 Color Server and provides explanations about the CXP3535 Color Server workspace and main windows.

Chapter 3 Setting up Client Workstations This chapter explains how set up PC and Macintosh client workstations and how to configure LPR printing. It also explains how to setup and configure Novell NDS.

Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

This chapter explains how to import jobs and set job parameters from the CXP3535 Color Server. It also explains how to reprint files from the Storage Folder and how to adjust job parameters post RIP.

Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

This chapter lists the methods for printing from client workstations, explains how to set job parameters using the PPD and shows how to monitor jobs from client workstations.

Chapter 6 Workflows and Tools This chapter describes the CXP3535 Color Server printing workflows: High Resolution (APR and OPI), VI, Imposition, Color and PDF. This chapter also provides information on printing pre-press files using the graphic art port (GAP).

Chapter 7 Managing Jobs This chapter explains how to manage jobs in the Queue Manager and in the Storage Folder. It also explainshow to export jobs to an InSite server and how to use the Job Preview & Editor tool and the job Thumbnail window. A section about managing disk space is also provided.

4 Chapter 1 Welcome

Product Overview The CXP3535 Color Server is an on-demand pre-press system that uses Creo Spire advanced pre-press technologies, to drive a Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer.

As an optimal digital color solution for printers, the CXP3535 Color Server enables you to print from PC, Macintosh, and UNIX client workstations. The CXP3535 Color Server processes image files in PDL formats (for example, PostScript, PDF, and Variable Information), using RIP (Raster Image Processor) technology. The system converts image files into a suitable RTP (Ready-To-Print) format for direct, high-quality digital printing. The CXP3535 Color Server also streamlines the printing process by allowing printing with preset workflows.

In combination with the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer, the CXP3535 Color Server enables casual users to produce professional-quality, full- color, finished documents quickly and easily, production of both black and white and color jobs: flyers, brochures, pamphlets, dummy catalogs, short-run trials, and print-on-demand publications. When installed as a

Chapter 8 Administrating the System This chapter explains how to administrate your system using the Administration window utilities.

Chapter 9 Job Accounting This chapter provides details about managing job accounting using the Accounting window.

Chapter 10 System Messages This chapter describes the various alerts and error messages. This chapter also provides explanations about viewing messages in the Job History, Message Viewer, and Alerts windows.

Appendix A Reinstalling the System This chapter describes the two methods for reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server software by complete overwrite or by system partition.

Appendix B Adding and External SCSI Device

This chapter describes how to add and external SCSI device to the CXP3535 Color Server.

Chapter Contents Description

Product Overview 5

fast, network printer with the CXP3535 Color Server, the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer, prints and copies up to 35 color or monochrome pages per minute Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer.

The CXP3535 Color Server combines RIP functionalities, automation, control tools and special hardware development capabilities with PC architecture. Users can scan, copy, print and load paper all at once.

CXP3535 Color Server for Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer

6 Chapter 1 Welcome

Composition The CXP3535 Color Server is a dedicated Creo platform running in a Windows 2000 environment.

The CXP3535 Color Server includes:

Creo hardware, including the interface board

X-Rite Calibration device

Software, including:

Creo Application Software

Windows 2000 Professional Operating System

The latest version of Adobe Acrobat

Ultimate InSpire Software

Features The CXP3535 Color Server provides the following main features:

Creating jobs in RTP format Using the CXP3535 Color Server, RTP files can be created and stored on the CXP3535 Color Server itself. This enables the user to print RTP data at any time without further processing.

Powerful document printing capabilities In combination with the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer, the CXP3535 Color Server enables complete printing and processing of documents, including the production of covers and pages on different paper stocks.

Enhanced job editing The CXP3535 Color Server enables the user to edit jobs, both pre- and post-RIP. Pre-RIP editing includes full Adobe Acrobat functionality including: deletion, extraction, rotating, adding, and cropping of pages. Post-RIP editing includes deleting job pages and merging pages from different jobs to a new job. This minimizes the need to re-RIP jobs.

Product Overview 7

RIP - Adobe Postscript Level III and Extreme Certified technologies The CXP3535 Color Server uses the industry-standard Adobe RIP, with enhancements for Continuous Tone and Linework. Data are processed separately as Continuous Tone and Vector Data layers for increased efficiency and merged during printing.

Ready-to-Print Job Preview and Editing The CXP3535 Color Server enables the user to preview RTP jobs up to pixel levels to see all job details and to verify job quality and content post-RIP. It is also possible to view a thumbnail list of job pages, or the actual raster pages.

Job Management The CXP3535 Color Server enables the user to monitor job progress during all stages of printing. Among other functions, you can promote, demote, delete, monitor the import process, and estimate when a job will be fully imported. You can also abort jobs during RIPing or printing, as well as archive and retrieve jobs.

Enhanced Text and Line Art Quality FAF (Full Auto Frame) The CXP3535 Color Server enables the user to choose superior text quality using the Creo proprietary algorithm. This function enhances the quality of diagonal lines, borders, blends, and small text. The Creo anti-aliasing causes blends to appear smooth with no banding and diagonal lines to appear crisp without jagged edges (do not use this option with VI jobs). The user may also choose superior image quality with the Creo proprietary smooth scale algorithm. This function improves the quality of images containing various resolutions (such as images taken from the Internet).

Trapping The CXP3535 Color Server uses the well-known Creo algorithm to trap job information easily. The FAF algorithm has been tailored for digital printing.

Imposition The CXP3535 Color Server offers a full suite of Imposition functions, based on the well-known Ultimate Imposition engine. On the CXP3535 Color Server, imposition is robust with user-friendly operation. And only the CXP3535 Color Server enables imposition of Variable Information jobs.

8 Chapter 1 Welcome

Color Management The CXP3535 Color Server has a number of color management tools and utilities that will help you to improve the quality of your jobs. The CXP3535 Color Server enables you to modify color on-the-fly, even for images that have already been RIPped. This functionality includes application of brightness and contrast adjustments, as well as changes to image gradation and calibration.

Variable Information Printing The CXP3535 Color Server enables processing of Creo Variable Print Specification and Xerox VIPP file formats and PPML for efficient VI (Variable Information) processing and printing. Repeated elements are RIPped once and cached, so there is no need to continually re-RIP them. The CXP3535 Color Server also provides easy management of VI elements, including previewing, deleting and updating. The CXP3535 Color Server also offers imposition for VI jobs, the only digital solution in the industry with this capability.

Creo Workflow Extenders This is a set of Adobe Photoshop and QuarkXPress software plug-ins and extensions that facilitate printing with the CXP3535 Color Server. These extensions are located in the shared Utilities folder on the CXP3535 Color Server or on CD #3 supplied with the CXP3535 Color Server software kit.

Job Batching In order to prevent cycling down, the CXP3535 Color Server streams several jobs into a single batch to prevent the printer from cycling down between jobs.

Web Viewer The CXP3535 Color Server Web Viewer provides online Spire information and can be accessed from client workstations. The user may view the CXP3535 Color Server queues, Storage folder and Alerts window, for remote job monitoring. In addition, the Spire Web Center enables the user to download remote client tools, utility applications, color profiles, and print drivers or view Spire related documentation.

Gallop The CXP3535 Color Server Gallop workflow enables the user to begin printing a defined number of pages before the entire job has been RIPped. This enables you to print and RIP concurrently. Printed pages can then be deleted automatically to free disk space.

Product Overview 9

Hot Folders For every published virtual printer, a hot folder is automatically created to enable the users to easily submit PDL jobs to the CXP3535 Color Server. To use the hot folders, simply drag and drop your jobs onto the required hot folder.

Integrated Preflight Check The CXP3535 Color Server Preflight check enables you to perform a preflight check of key job components, before a job is sent for processing. This feature detects missing job components all at once, saves inefficient processing time with constant error / failed messages and consequently shortens the correction cycle dramatically. The following key job components are checked:

Fonts

Hi-resolution images

Spot colors

Graphic Arts Port The Graphic Arts Port (GAP) on the CXP3535 Color Server connects with other Creo workflow systems, including Brisque workflow software and Prinergy workflow management, and opens the server to popular graphic arts file formats, such as TIFF, TIFF/IT and CT/ LW, so you can redirect urgent jobs from offset to digital printing, or proof offset jobs on a digital printer.

Spire Spot Color Editor The CXP3535 Color Server enables you to tune your spots according to your personal requirements. In addition, you may create custom spot colors with fixed CMYK values according to your personal requirements.

PDF2Go CXP3535 Color Server contains a built in proofing tool - the PDF2GO port. The PDF2Go port converts RTP files to standard PDF files, which can then be easily submitted by email for proofing, shortening the approval cycle significantly.

Mixed Media Documents CXP3535 Color Server provides you with the ability to create finished documents with mixed media types; you may add inserts, tabs and covers to your job, and collect a truly finished product from the printer, eliminating the need to separately prepare and combine the finishing material.

10 Chapter 1 Welcome

Admin Remote Tool The CXP3535 Color Server Remote Admin utility, enables the system administrator to connect, view, operate and perform administration actions on the CXP3535 Color Server from his client workstation. The remote connection password secured.

Supported Formats The CXP3535 Color Server supports the following file formats:

PostScript (composite or pre-separated files)

PDF

EPS

Creo VPS (Variable Print Specification)

VIPP (Variable Data Intelligent PostScript Params)

PPML (Personalized Print Markup Language)

GAP (Graphic Art Port) files (file formats from various prepress systems, for example Brisque job and TIFF / IT)

Creo CT & LW

JPG, TIFF

Workflow The CXP3535 Color Server receives and processes files from the following client workstations:

Macintosh: running Mac OS 8.5.x or higher and Mac OS X (10.1 and higher).

PC: running Windows 98 / ME / Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / and XP

UNIX Workstations and Servers

Product Overview 11

The CXP3535 Color Server basic workflow is as follows:

12 Chapter 1 Welcome

Data Flow

The CXP3535 Color Server data flow is as follows:

1. The input file arrives at the CXP3535 Color Server from either a client workstation, local hard disk, or external media and is submitted to the Process queue.

2. The processing sub-system produces an RTP job from the input file.

3. The RTP job is stored on an image disk.

4. When printing starts, the RTP job elements on the disk are decompressed and merged to the correct location on the page. This is done using Creo hardware.

5. The image delivery sub-system converts the RTP information into the print engine format.

6. The image delivery sub-system transmits the page information to the print engine.

7. The page data is delivered to the Print Engine and the job is printed.

Product Overview 13

CXP3535 Color Server Network Printers For Macintosh and PC networks, the CXP3535 Color Server provides three default network printers, known also as virtual printers.

Virtual printers are a function used for automating workflows, which then define job streaming. They contain preset workflows that are automatically applied to all print jobs processed with that virtual printer. There is no need to reset job settings for each job, thus increasing printing efficiency.

The three default virtual printers are:

SpoolStore Files are spooled directly to the Storage Folder and await operator processing. You can only import PDL files (such as: PS, PDF, VIPP, VPS) to the spool store, not RIPped - RTP files.

ProcessPrint Files sent to this virtual printer are processed and printed directly to the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer via the CXP3535 Color Server.

ProcessStore Files sent to this virtual printer are automatically processed and stored in RTP format. After processing, the files are stored in the Storage Folder of the CXP3535 Color Server until the print operator re- submits them for printing.

With printing workflows tailored to your job requirements, the CXP3535 Color Server enables you to:

Define new virtual printers

Choose from which virtual printer to print

Note: The job (print) parameters set in the job (from the client) override the parameters set in the virtual printer.

For information on defining and editing virtual printers, see Virtual Printers on page 382.

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Getting Started

Powering Up.....................................................................................16

Test Page ..........................................................................................17

The CXP3535 Color Server Workspace ..............................................19

Shut Down and Power Off ................................................................29

16 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Powering Up

To power up the CXP3535 Color Server:

1. Switch on the monitor.

2. Click the Power button on the front panel of the CXP3535 Color Server. The power LED on the front panel lights-up. The Windows 2000 System starts and a test page is printed.

CXP3535 Color Server in the Start Menu The CXP3535 Color Server program group appears in the Windows Start menu.

To open the CXP3535 Color Server workspace:

Click the Start button and follow the path CXP3535>CXP3535.

Important: You should always power up the CXP3535 Color Server first, and then power up the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer.

Note: If the CXP3535 Color Server is already powered up, open the workspace using the Start menu (as described in the following section).

Test Page 17

The CXP3535 Color Server splash appears followed by the CXP3535 Color Server workspace.

Test Page The first time you power on your CXP3535 Color Server a test page is printed automatically. After the test page is printed, the First Time Configuration wizard appears to enable you to set the CXP3535 Color Server configuration.

This test page will also be printed each time the CXP3535 Color Server is powered on or restarted.

For details see the CXP3535 Color Server Technical Manual.

You may change this default setting in the Administration window. For details see Enable Test Page on page 381.

18 Chapter 2 Getting Started

The test page includes the following information:

Date

CXP3535 Color Server information:

Spire Version

Server Name (host name)

Last Calibration Date

Print engine information:

Software version: displays the connected Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer version.

Network Setup:

Enable DHCP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

AppleTalk Zone

IPX Tree Name

IPX Context Name

Note: The first time the system is powered on, this information is N/A (unavailable).

The CXP3535 Color Server Workspace 19

The CXP3535 Color Server Workspace After the CXP3535 Color Server is powered up, the CXP3535 Color Server workspace automatically appears. The workspace area items are described on the following page.

6

4 5

1

7

2

3

20 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Workspace Items The following table shortly describes the workspace area items. Further details are provided in the following sections and throughout the guide.

Menu Bar The Menu bar (item number 1) includes the Job, Selection, Tools, Control and Help menus. Click on a menu name to open the corresponding drop- down menu.

Item Name Description

1 Menu Bar Includes the workspace menus. For details see Menu Bar on page 20.

2 Status Panel Includes the Logo Pane, In Process pane, In Print pane and the In Storage pane and the DFE & Printer Animation. For details see Status Panel on page 21.

3 Pathways Panel Enables you to open / close workspace windows. For details see Pathways Panel on page 25.

4 Queue Manager Consists of the In Process and In Print queues. For details see Queue Manager on page 25.

5 Job Thumbnail Enables you to view a thumbnail of RTP jobs. For details see Job Thumbnail on page 26.

6 Storage Folder Stores RTP jobs. For details see Storage Folder on page 27.

7 Alerts window Lists all the error messages that were generated during the workflow. For details see Alerts Window on page 28.

The CXP3535 Color Server Workspace 21

Status Panel The Status panel (item number 2) includes the Logo Pane, In Process pane, In Print pane and the Storage Folder pane.

The DFE & Printer Animation is displayed on the right of the Status panel and presents an animation of the DFE and Printer in their current configuration (basic configuration or optional configuration, with a finisher tray).

In addition, to the right of the printer animation, messages regarding the printer operation mode and status are displayed.

Printer operation messages such as Printing, Ready, Low power mode and Sleep mode appear in green. See the above graphic. Printer status messages such as Finisher tray is full, Paper Jam, Door open and Out of paper, appear in red. See the following example.

The DFE Monitor

Clicking the DFE Animation opens the DFE Monitor window. This window displays information regarding disk space, network details and connected virtual printers.

For further information see Queue Manager Status Panel Information on page 325 and Storage Folder Status Panel Information on page 334.

DFE Animation Printer Animation

Note: When the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer is used for copying pages, the message Copier Mode appears in red and the printer animation presents the copying action. As long as the printer is in this state, the In Print queues freezes and you cannot print jobs.

22 Chapter 2 Getting Started

The Disk Usage tab enables you to view the free and used disk space details in the User and Printer disks.

The Network tab enables you to view the network details such as Host name, IP address, etc.

The CXP3535 Color Server Workspace 23

The Virtual Printers tab enables you to view the defined virtual printers and their published status.

The Printer Monitor

Clicking the Printer Animation, opens the Printer Monitor window. The Printer Monitor window enables you to view information related to the printer resources such as paper stock, connected devices and consumables status.

The Paper Stock tab displays the details of the paper stock in each tray and also shows if this tray is ready or empty.

24 Chapter 2 Getting Started

The Finisher tab displays the details of connected finishing devices.

The Consumables tab displays the status of the CMYK toner and drum, waste toner container and fuser.

The CXP3535 Color Server Workspace 25

Pathways Panel The Pathways panel (item number 3) buttons enables you to open / close the following workspace windows: the Queue Manager, the Storage Folder, the Thumbnail window, and the Alerts window. These workspace windows are explained in the following sections. In addition, you may also open/close the Administration window.

Queue Manager

The lower area of the Queue Manager (item number 4)consists of the In Process queue, which lists the files to be processed. After a file has been processed successfully, it moves to the upper area - the In Print queue and waits to be printed, or the file moves to the Storage Folder for future printing (depending on the job flow). Failed jobs and jobs that cannot be successfully RIPped also move to the Storage Folder.

For further information on the Administration window, see The Administration Window on page 374.

For further details see Queue Manager on page 320.

26 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Job Thumbnail

The Job Thumbnail window (item number 5) enables you to view a small image representation (thumbnail) of RTP jobs, to help you identify them before printing. It also indicates the jobs title, the file type, the print range, the number of copies you have specified to print the job, the sequential number of the current displayed page, and additional details regarding imposition, paper stock and orientation. This enables you to view some of the job parameters while previewing the job.

For further details see Thumbnail Window on page 370.

The CXP3535 Color Server Workspace 27

Storage Folder

RTP jobs are stored in, and reprinted from, the Storage Folder (item number 6).

The Storage Folder also contains files that:

Have completed printing

Were aborted during processing or printing

Failed to complete processing or printing

Were imported or downloaded directly from a client workstation to the Storage Folder.

The Storage Folder also holds PDL files (for example, PostScript files that were spooled directly to the Storage Folder).

For further details, see Storage Folder on page 332.

28 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Alerts Window

Any time the system emits an Error type message, the message appears in the Alerts window (item number 7), which lists all the error messages that were generated during the workflow. You may specify whether you would like the Alert window to launch automatically on a new error, or upon user selection.

For further information see The Alerts Window on page 450.

Shut Down and Power Off 29

Shut Down and Power Off

To shut down and power off the CXP3535 Color Server:

1. In the CXP3535 Color Server workspace, from the Job menu select Exit. Or: Click the close button in the top right hand corner of the CXP3535 Color Server workspace. The CXP3535 Color Server workspace closes and you are returned to the Windows desktop.

2. Verify that the Spire icon has disappeared from your taskbar.

3. From the Windows desktop, select Start>Shut Down.

4. In the Shutdown window, select Shut down.

5. When the Windows shutdown is complete, switch off the monitor.

6. On the CXP3535 Color Server, click the Power button behind the front door. The power LED on the front panel goes off.

Note: If there are jobs that are being processed or printed a message will be displayed.

Taskbar without Spire logoTaskbar with Spire logo

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Setting Up Client Workstations

Default Network Printers on PC and Macintosh Clients .....................32

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations.....................................33

Defining a Printer on Macintosh Client Workstations.........................57

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server .....................................65

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration.................................................99

32 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

Default Network Printers on PC and Macintosh Clients For Macintosh and PC networks, the CXP3535 Color Server provides three default network printers, known as virtual printers: ProcessPrint, ProcessStore and SpoolStore.

Virtual printers contain preset workflows that are automatically applied to all print jobs processed with that virtual printer. There is no requirement to reset job settings for each job. This functionality results in greatly increased printing efficiency.

The CXP3535 Color Server enables you to select which virtual printer to print to. It also allows you to define new virtual printers, with printing workflows tailored to your specific job requirements.

An additional default network printer is provided for Macintosh networks.

Fontdownloader This is a special network printer used with Macintosh clients to download fonts. The FontDownLoader enables you to send fonts to the CXP3535 Color Server to be used later in printed jobs. It is not possible to send files via the FontDownLoader, only fonts.

Note: The job (print) parameters set in the job override the parameters set in the virtual printer.

For more information see Virtual Printers on page 382 and CXP3535 Color Server Network Printers on page 13.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 33

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations PC client workstations with the following operating systems installed, can print to the CXP3535 Color Server: Windows 98/ME and Windows NT 4.0/2000 and XP. The CXP3535 Color Server network printers are defined using the Windows Add Printer Wizard - Network Printers.

Defining a Printer - Windows NT 4.0

To define a CXP3535 Color Server Network Printer through the Windows Add Printer Wizard:

1. On your Windows desktop, click the Start button and follow the path Settings>Printers.

2. Double-click the Add Printer icon. The Add Printer Wizard appears.

3. Select Network Printer Server and click Next.

4. Browse through the network for the CXP3535 Color Server and double-click the server name.

Note: When adding a new CXP3535 Color Server network printer to a client workstation, there is no need to install the CXP3535 Color Server PPD and Adobe PS printer driver separately. They are installed automatically through the Windows Add Printer Wizard.

34 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

A list of the network printers is displayed.

5. Select one of the network printers (for example, ProcessPrint), and click OK.

6. If you want to set this printer as the default printer on your computer, select Yes. Otherwise, select No.

7. Click Next.

8. Click Finish to complete the setup. The CXP3535 Color Server network printer is now successfully installed.

9. Repeat the above process to install additional network printers.

To define a CXP3535 Color Server Network Printer through the Network Neighborhood:

1. Browse to the required network printer.

2. Double-click the network printer icon. A Printers message appears.

Note: The CXP3535 Color Server is provided with three network printers: ProcessPrint, ProcessStore and SpoolStore.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 35

3. Click Yes to setup the printer. The network printer is defined on your PC client workstation.

4. Repeat the above process to install additional network printers.

5. From the Printers list, select the CXP3535 Color Server and click Next.

Defining a Printer - Windows 98

To define a CXP3535 Color Server network printer through the Windows Add Printer Wizard:

1. On your Windows desktop, click the Start button, and follow the path Settings>Printers.

2. Double-click the Add Printer icon. The Add Printer Wizard appears.

3. Click Next. The following window appears.

Note: When adding a new CXP3535 Color Server network printer to a client workstation, there is no need to install the CXP3535 Color Server PPD and Adobe PS printer driver separately. They are installed automatically through the Windows>Add Printer Wizard.

36 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

4. Select Network printer and click Next. The following window appears.

5. Type the network path or the queue name of your printer. If you dont know the exact name, click Browse to view the available network printers.

.

6. Select one of the network printers (for example, ProcessPrint).

7. Click OK.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 37

8. Click Next. The following window appears.

9. If you want to set this printer as the default printer on your computer, select Yes. Otherwise, select No.

10. Click Next.

11. Select Yes to print a test page. The CXP3535 Color Server network printer is now successfully installed.

12. Click Finish to complete the setup.

13. Repeat the above process to install additional network printers.

To define a CXP3535 Color Server Network Printer through the network neighborhood:

1. Browse to the required network printer.

2. Double-click the network printer icon. The Add Printer Wizard appears and the network printer is defined on your PC client workstation.

3. Repeat the above process to install additional network printers.

38 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

Defining a Printer - Windows 2000 and ME

To define a CXP3535 Color Server network printer though the Windows Add Printer Wizard:

1. On your Windows desktop, click the Start button and follow the path Settings>Printers.

2. Double-click the Add Printer icon. The Add Printer Wizard appears.

3. Click Next. The following window appears.

4. Select Network printer.

5. Click Next.

Note: When adding a new CXP3535 Color Server network printer to a client workstation, there is no need to install the CXP3535 Color Server PPD and Adobe PS printer driver separately. They are installed automatically through the Windows Add Printer Wizard.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 39

The following window appears.

6. Select Type the printer name, or click Next to browse for a printer.

7. Type the exact name of the printer in the Name box. Or: Click Next to browse for a printer.

40 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

The following window appears.

8. Select one of the network printers (for example, ProcessPrint).

9. Click Next.

10. If you want to set this printer as the default printer on your computer, select Yes. Otherwise, select No.

11. Click Next.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 41

The following window appears.

12. Click Finish to complete the setup. The CXP3535 Color Server network printer is now successfully installed.

13. Repeat the above process to install additional network printers.

To define a CXP3535 Color Server network printer through Network Neighborhood:

1. Browse to the required network printer.

2. Double-click the network printer icon. A Printers message appears.

3. Click Yes to setup the printer. The network printer is defined on your PC client workstation.

4. Repeat the above process to install additional network printers.

42 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

Defining a Printer - Windows XP

To define a CXP3535 Color Server network printer though the Windows Add Printer Wizard:

1. On your Windows desktop, click the Start button and follow the path Printers and Faxes.

The Printer and Faxes window appears.

2. From the Printer Tasks, select Add a printer. The Add Printer Wizard appears.

3. Click Next.

Note: When adding a new CXP3535 Color Server network printer to a client workstation, there is no need to install the CXP3535 Color Server PPD and Adobe PS printer driver separately. They are installed automatically through the Windows Add Printer Wizard.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 43

The Local or Network Printer window appears.

4. Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer and click Next.

44 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

The Specify a Printer window appears.

5. Select Browse for a printer and click Next. The Browse for Printer window appears.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 45

6. Browse to the CXP3535 Color Serverand double-click it to display the list of network printers.

7. Select the printer you wish to setup and click Next. The Default Printer window appears.

8. If you want to set this printer as the default printer on your computer, select Yes. Otherwise, select No.

9. Click Next.

46 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

The following window appears.

10. Click Finish to close the wizard. The CXP3535 Color Server network printer is added to your printer list.

To define a CXP3535 Color Server network printer in Windows XP through the Network:

1. Browse to the required network printer.

2. Double-click on the network printer icon. The network printer is defined on your PC client workstation.

3. Repeat the above process to install additional network printers.

Creating PostScript Files on the PC The following procedures describe how to create PostScript files using the CXP3535 Color Server from the client workstation. This is useful when you are not connected to the CXP3535 Color Server and you need to distribute jobs for printing on the CXP3535 Color Server remotely or on external media. These files can then be imported to the CXP3535 Color Server for printing.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 47

To create a PostScript File:

1. Open a job in your DTP application (for example, Microsoft Word), and from the File menu, select Print. The Print window appears.

2. Select the Print to File check box.

3. Click OK. A PostScript file is now created.

48 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

To define a Print-to-File printer locally:

1. Start the Adobe PostScript Driver application (the application is available on CD#3 in the Utilities folder, or at Adobe's Web site at www.adobe.com).

The Welcome window appears.

2. Click Next. The End User License Agreement window appears.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 49

3. Read the License Agreement and click Accept. The following window appears.

4. Select It is directly connected to your computer (Local Printer), and click Next. The following window appears.

5. Select the FILE: Local Port and click Next.

50 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

The following window appears.

6. Click Browse. The Browse for Printer window appears.

7. Click the Network buttonand browse to your CXP3535 Color Server.

Note: The next step is to configure the printer with the CXP3535 Color Server PPD. The CXP3535 Color Server PPD (CXP3535.ppd).

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 51

The Map Network Drive window appears.

8. Locate the CXP3535 Color Server and double click on the server icon. Then, double-click the Utilities folder.

9. Click OK. The Browse for Printer window appears.

10. Double click the PPD folder and select the CXP3535 Color Server PPD: CXP3535.ppd.

52 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

11. Click OK. The following window appears.

12. From the Printers list, select the CXP3535 Color Server printer, and click Next.

13. Select Not Shared and click Next.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 53

The following window appears.

14. Type a name for the printer which you will be able to identify on the client workstation, for example CXP3535_ProcessStore.

15. Select Yes (Recommended) if you want to print a test page or select No, then click Next.

16. Click Install to install the Print to file printer with the CXP3535 Color Server PPD. When prompted to configure the printer, click Yes and then click Next.

17. Select Yes.

18. Click Next.

54 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

The Printer Properties window appears.

19. Configure the printer according to your specifications and then click OK.

20. Click Finish to complete the setup. The printer appears in the Printers window.

You are now ready to print *.ps and *.prn files. Once printed, these files can be imported and printed on the CXP3535 Color Server.

Defining a Printer on PC Client Workstations 55

Copying PPD from PC It is necessary to use the CXP3535 Color Server PPD to create PS files to send to the CXP3535 Color Server. The CXP3535 Color Server PPD should therefore be copied and distributed to the customer.

To copy the PPD from the CXP3535 Color Server for distribution on a diskette or by e-mail:

1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the Network Neighborhood/ My Network Places icon.

2. Browse to the location of the CXP3535 Color Server station (for example, CXP3535).

3. Select the CXP3535 Color Server and its Utilities folder.

4. Select the required PPD folder (the default PPD is English).

5. Copy the CXP3535.ppd file to a diskette or send it by e-mail to the customer.

Printing from a PC

To print from a PC:

1. Open the file you would like to print, in the corresponding application (for example open a PDF file in Adobe Acrobat).

2. From the File menu, select Print. The Print window appears.

56 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

3. From the Name list, select the required CXP3535 Color Server network printer (for example, Spire_ProcessPrint).

4. If required, click the Properties button and modify the job parameters.

5. Click OK.

6. Click OK in the Print window. The file is sent to the CXP3535 Color Server.

Note: Any changes to the printer parameters override the parameters of the selected virtual printer, unless the virtual printer was specified the Override PPD Parameters options was selected. Printer's Default indicates that the value is taken from settings of the selected virtual printer on the CXP3535 Color Server.

Defining a Printer on Macintosh Client Workstations 57

Defining a Printer on Macintosh Client Workstations The CXP3535 Color Server can print to Macintosh client workstations running Macintosh OS 9 and OS X (10.2).

You can also submit jobs using the CXP3535 Color Server virtual printers over a TCP/IP protocol. This connection enables a significantly higher spooling speed.

Setting the Network Printer for Macintosh OS 9

To set up a CXP3535 Color Server network printer on Macintosh OS 9:

1. Copy the CXP3535 Color Server PPD file to the Printer Descriptions folder on your client workstation.

2. From the Apple menu, select Chooser.

3. Select LaserWriter and browse through the network to the CXP3535 Color Server.

For further details, see Spire Over TCP/IP on page 88.

For further details, see the procedure To copy the CXP3535 Color Server PPD: on page 86.

58 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

4. Select one of the CXP3535 Color Server's network printers (for example, CXP3535_ProcessStore) and click Create. The following status indicator appears.

5. The system should automatically locate the CXP3535 Color Server PPD and configure the printer. If it does not, click Select PPD.

6. From the list of Printer Descriptions, select CXP3535.ppd.

7. Click the Select button.

Defining a Printer on Macintosh Client Workstations 59

The printer is now set as a CXP3535 Color Server network printer.

If you have the Desktop Printer Spooler extension enabled, a printer icon appears on the desktop.

8. Repeat the above process to install additional network printers.

Setting the Network Printer for Macintosh OS X (10.2)

To set up a CXP3535 Color Server network printer on Macintosh OS X:

1. Copy the CXP3535 Color Server PPD file to the Library>Printers>PPDs folder on your client workstation.

2. From the Go menu, select Applications.

Note: This icon can be used when downloading PS files to the CXP3535 Color Server.

For further details, see the procedure To copy the CXP3535 PPD: on page 81.

60 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

3. Open the Utilities folder.

4. Double-click the Print Center icon. The Printer List window appears.

Defining a Printer on Macintosh Client Workstations 61

5. Click the Add Printer button. The following window appears.

6. Select AppleTalk asthe connection type and the required AppleTalk zone.

7. Browse to the CXP3535 Color Server.

8. Open the Printer Model pop-up menu and select Other.

Note: If you would like to use the LPR protocol instead, see the procedure To Configure an LPR Printer on page 84.

62 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

9. Browse to the folder to which you have copied the CXP3535.ppd and select it.

10. Click the Choose button to assign the CXP3535.ppd to the selected CXP3535 Color Server network printer. The following window appears.

Defining a Printer on Macintosh Client Workstations 63

11. Click the Add button to add the new printer to the printer list. The new printer is displayed in the Printer List window.

Printing from a Macintosh

To print from a Macintosh computer:

1. Open the file you would like to print, in the corresponding application (for example open a Word document in Microsoft Word).

2. From the File menu, select Print. The Print window appears.

64 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

3. From the Printer list, select the required printer (for example, Color_ProcessPrint).

4. To set job parameters, click General andfrom the pop-up menu, select one of the Printer Specific Options. A window similar to the one shown below appears.

5. Adjust the printer options as required.

6. After modifying the job settings, click Print. The file is sent to the CXP3535 Color Server.

Note: Printer's Default indicates that the value is taken from the currently selected virtual printer. The PPD parameters are divided up into five Printer Specific Options in the drop-down menu.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 65

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server This section covers the procedures for setting up and configuring an LPR / TCP/IP printer from the following computers:

Windows NT 4.0

Windows 2000/XP

Windows NT/2000/XP Command Line

Mac OS X (10.2)

Mac OS 9 (using the Choose Spire Over IP utility)

Linux

AIX and UNIX command line

Setting up an LPR Printer in Windows NT 4.0 The following procedure describes how to configure an LPR printer in Windows NT 4.0 for printing to the CXP3535 Color Server.

The following items must be installed and configured on the Windows NT 4.0 computer (Server or Workstation version) before you begin:

1. TCP/IP protocol.

66 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

2. Microsoft TCP/IP Printing service.

3. Latest Adobe PS Printer Driver (you can install this from the CXP3535 Color Server D:\Utilties\PC utilities, or you can download the latest version free from www.adobe.com).

4. CXP3535 PPD (PostScript Printer Driver) copied to your client workstation (the PPD is located in the D:\Utilities\PPD folder on the CXP3535 Color Server).

To define an LPR Printer

1. From the Start menu on the Windows desktop, select Settings>Printers.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 67

2. In the Printer window, from the File menu, select Server Properties.

3. Select the Port tab, and then click the Add Port button.

4. From the list of Available Printer Ports, select LPR Port, and click the New Port button.

5. Type the exact name of the CXP3535 Color Server (this box is case- sensitive), for example, OPAL5 in the Name or address of server providing lpd: box.

68 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

6. Type the exact name of the network printer you want to print to (you can view the exact name of the printer on the CXP3535 Color Server, under: Admin>Resource Manager>Virtual Printers). In this example the printer name is OPAL5_ProcessPrint.

7. Click OK.

8. Click Close in the Printer Ports window. The new LPR port is now defined on your computer.

9. Click OK in the Print Server Properties window.

10. Define the LPR printer using the Adobe PostScript Printer driver application. See the following procedure.

To define an LPR Printer using the Adobe PostScript Driver:

1. Start the Adobe PostScript Driver Application (you can install this from the D:\Utilties\Utilities\PC Utilities on the CXP3535 Color Server, or you can download the latest version free from www.adobe.com).

2. In the Welcome window click Next. The End User License Agreement window appears.

3. Read the license agreement, and then click Accept.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 69

4. Select Install a new PostScript Printer, and then click Next.

5. In the Printer Connection Type window, select It is directly connected to your computer (Local Printer), and then click Next.

6. Select the LPR port you defined earlier, for example, OPAL5_ProcessPrint LPR, and then click Next.

7. The next step is to configure the printer with the CXP3535 Color Server PPD (make sure that you have copied this to your computer, or that you have access to the CXP3535 Color Server on your network).

8. In the Select Printer Model window, click Browse. The Browse for Printer window appears.

70 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

9. Locate the CXP3535 Color Server PPD, and then select the CXP3535 Color Server PPD: CXP3535.ppd.

10. Click OK.

11. In the Select Printer Model window, select the CXP3535,and then click Next.

12. In the Sharing window, select Not Shared, and then click Next. The following window appears.

13. Type a name for the printer that you will be able to identify on your computer, for example OPAL5_ProcessPrint LPR. You can also keep the original name of the printer.

14. If you want to set this printer as the default printer on your computer, select Yes. Otherwise, select No.

15. Select Yes (Recommended) if you want to print a test page. Otherwise, select No.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 71

16. Click Next.

17. In the Setup Information window, click Install to install the LPR printer with the CXP3535 Color Server PPD.

18. When prompted to configure the printer, click Yes.

19. Click Next.

20. In the Printer Configuration window, select Yes when prompted to configure the printer now.

21. Click Next. The CXP3535 Properties window appears.

22. Configure the printer according to your specifications, and then click OK.

23. In the Setup Complete window click Finish to complete the setup. The new LPR printer is now listed with your other printers on the Windows NT computer, and you are now ready to print to the CXP3535 Color Server using the LPR.

72 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

Setting up an LPR Printer in Windows 2000/XP The following procedure describes how to configure an LPR printer in Windows 2000/XP for printing to the CXP3535 Color Server.

The following items must be installed and configured on the Windows 2000/XP computer before you begin:

1. TCP/IP protocol

2. Latest Adobe PS Printer Driver (you can install this from the d:\utilties\Utilities\PC utilities on the CXP3535 Color Server or you can download the latest version free from www.adobe.com).

3. CXP3535 PPD (PostScript Printer Driver) copied to your client workstation (the PPD is located in the d:\utilities\PPD\ folder on the CXP3535 Color Server).

To define an LPR Printer (Windows XP):

1. From the Start menu on the Windows desktop, select Settings>Printers and Faxes.

2. In the Printers and Faxes window, from the File menu, select Server Properties.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 73

3. Select the Port tab, and then click the Add Port button.

4. From the list of Available Printer Ports, select Standard TCP/IP Port, and then click the New Port button.

5. Click Next.

6. Type the exact name of the CXP3535 Color Server (this box is case- sensitive), for example, OPAL5 in the Printer Name or IP Address: box.

7. Type a name for the printer that you will be able to identify on your computer, for example, OPAL5ProcessPrint LPR.

74 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

8. Click Next. The following window appears.

9. Select Custom in the Device Type option, and then click Settings.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 75

10. Select the following options:

Protocol: LPR

LPR Settings:

Queue Name: type the exact name of the network printer you want to print to (you can view the exact name of the printer on the CXP3535 Color Server, under: Admin>Resource Manager>Virtual Printers). In this example the Printer name is OPAL5_ProcessPrint.

LPR Byte Counting Enabled: selected.

11. Click OK and then click Next. The following window appears.

12. Click Finish.

76 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

13. Click Close in the Printer Ports window. The new Standard TCP/IP Printer Port is now defined on your computer.

14. Click Close in the Print Server Properties window.

15. Define the TCP/IP Printer using the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver application. See the following procedure.

To define an LPR Printer using the Adobe PostScript Driver:

1. Start the Adobe PostScript Driver Application (you can install this from the D:\Utilties\Utilities\PC Utilities on the CXP3535 Color Server, or you can download the latest version free from www.adobe.com).

2. In the Welcome window, click Next.

3. The End User License Agreement window appears, read the license agreement, and then click Accept.

4. Select Install a new PostScript Printer, and then click Next.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 77

5. In the Printer Connection Type window, select It is directly connect to your computer (Local Printer), and then click Next. The following window appears.

6. Select the Standard TCP/IP port you defined earlier on, for example, OPAL5_ProcessPrint LPR, and then click Next.

7. The next step is to configure the printer with the CXP3535 Color Server PPD (make sure that you have copied this to your computer, or that you have access the CXP3535 Color Server on your network).

8. In the Select Printer Model window, click Browse. The Browse for Printer window appears.

9. Locate the CXP3535 Color Server PPD, and then select the CXP3535 Color Server PPD: CXP3535.ppd.

10. Click OK.

78 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

11. In the Select Printer Model window, select the CXP6K3_6,and then click Next.

12. In the Sharing window, select Not Shared, and then click Next.

13. Type a name for the printer that you will be able to identify on your computer, for example, OPAL5_ProcessPrint LPR. You can also keep the original name of the printer.

14. If you want to set this printer as the default printer on your computer, select Yes. Otherwise, select No.

15. Select Yes (Recommended) if you want to print a test page. Otherwise, select No.

16. Click Next.

17. In the Setup Information window, click Install to install the LPR printer with the CXP3535 Color Server PPD.

18. When prompted to configure the printer, click Yes.

19. Click Next.

20. In the Printer Configuration window, select Yes when prompted to configure the printer now.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 79

21. Click Next. The CXP3535 Properties window appears.

22. Configure the printer according to your specifications, and then click OK.

23. In the Setup Complete window, click Finish to complete the setup. The new LPR printer is now listed with your other printers on the Windows NT computer, and you are now ready to print to the CXP3535 Color Server using the LPR.

80 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

Windows NT/2000/XP Command Line You can also submit PostScript, PDF or VPS files for printing to the CXP3535 Color Server using the following commands in the Window command line. The following procedure is suitable for Windows NT, 2000, or XP computers.

1. From the Start menu, click Run.

2. Type cmd, and then click OK.

3. Locate the directory that contains the file(s) you want to print.

4. Type the following at the command line (all commands, server name, and printer name are case-sensitive): lpr S -P -ol and then press ENTER. For example: lpr S OPAL3 P OPAL3_ProcessPrint ol brochure.ps

Your file is printed to the CXP3535 Color Server using the LPR command.

Note: All PostScript files should be created using the CXP3535 Color Server PPD (CXP3535.ppd)

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 81

Setting up an LPR Printer in Macintosh OS X (10.2) Before you define a network printer you need to install the CXP3535 Color Server PPD to your Macintosh.

Copying the CXP3535 Color Server PPD

To copy the CXP3535 PPD:

1. From the Go menu, select Connect to Server.

The Connect to Server window appears.

2. Browse to the required CXP3535 Color Server.

3. Click the Connect button.

82 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

The following window appears.

4. Select Guest and click the Connect button. The following window appears.

5. Select the Utilities folder, and click OK. The Utilities folder is mounted on your desktop.

6. Double-click the Utilities folder on your desktop.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 83

7. Double-click the PPD folder.

8. Copy the CXP3535.ppd from the CXP3535 Color Server to your Macintosh hard disk.

Tip: It is recommended that you copy the PPD by dragging and dropping from the CXP3535 Color Server to the Library>Printers>PPDs folder on your Macintosh.

84 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

Configuring an LPR Printer

To configure an LPR Printer:

1. Follow the procedure To set up a CXP3535 Color Server network printer on Macintosh OS X on page 59, until step 5.

2. In the Printer List window, select LPR Printers using IP as the connection type.

3. In the LPR Printer's Address box, type the TCP/IP address or hostname of the CXP3535 Color Server. See the following example.

4. Clear the Use Default Queue on Server check-box.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 85

5. In the Queue Name box, type the full name of the CXP3535 Color Server network printer, for example CXP7_ProcessPrint (case- sensitive).

6. From the Printer Model pop-up menu, select Other.

7. Browse to the folder to which you have copied the CXP3535.ppd and select it.

8. Click the Choose button to assign the CXP3535.ppd to the selected CXP3535 Color Server network printer. The following window appears.

86 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

9. Click the Add button to add the new printer to the printer list. The new printer is displayed in the Printer List window.

Setting up an LPR printer in Mac OS 9 (using the Choose Spire Over IP utility) Before setting up a CXP3535 Color Server network printer, you need to install the CXP3535 Color Server PPD on the Macintosh workstation.

Copying the Spire PPD

To copy the CXP3535 Color Server PPD:

1. From the Apple menu, select Chooser.

2. Select AppleShare and browse the network to where the CXP3535 Color Server is configured.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 87

3. Select the CXP3535 Color Server (for example CXP3535), and click OK.

The Login window appears.

4. Log in as Guest, and click the Connect button. The corresponding CXP3535 Color Server window appears.

88 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

5. Select the Utilities folder and click OK.

6. Select the Utilities volume located on the desktop and click OK.

7. Select the PPD folder.

8. Copy the CXP3535.ppd file to the System Folder>Extensions>Printer Descriptions folder. The CXP3535 Color Server PPD is now installed in the Printer Descriptions folder. It is ready to be configured with one of the CXP3535 Color Server's network printers.

Spire Over TCP/IP The Spire Over TCP/IP application enables Macintosh clients to submit jobs using the CXP3535 Color Server virtual printers over a TCP/IP protocol. This connection enables a significantly higher spooling speed.

Note: Do not select the check box, otherwise it will mount with every reboot.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 89

To install this application, you will require a Macintosh O/S version 8.6 or higher, with an installed LaserWriter application version 8.6 or higher, or AdobePS 8.8 or higher (available at http://www.adobe.com). If you do not have a compatible LaserWriter application installed, you may download this application from the CXP3535 Color Server, under D:\Utilities\Mac Utilities folder.

To install the Choose Spire Over IP application:

1. On your Macintosh client workstation, from the Apple menu, select Chooser. The Chooser window appears.

2. Select AppleShare and browse the network to the required CXP3535 Color Server (for example Falcon_Color) and click OK. The Login window appears.

90 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

3. Select Guest and click the Connect button. The corresponding CXP3535 Color Server window appears.

4. Select the Utilities folder and click OK. The Utilities folder icon appears on your desktop; double-click it to open the folder.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 91

5. Double-click the Choose Spire Over IP Installer icon.

6. Click the Install button. After the installation is complete, the following message appears.

7. Click Quit. The Choose Spire Over IP option is now added to the Apple menu.

92 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

8. To create desktop printers for printing over IP, from the Apple menu, select Choose Spire Over IP.

9. To view the print queues of the CXP3535 Color Server, double-click the Local Services and then double-click the CXP3535 Color Server icon (in this example FALCON_COLOR).

10. To create a desktop printer for a specific print queue, select the print queue from the list (for example FALCON_COLOR_Process Print) and click the Setup button. The following window appears.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 93

11. Select the Select a PPD file on this computer option and click OK. The following window appears.

12. Browse to the CXP3535 Color Server PPD file, that you have copied to your computer in step 1, select it and click Open. The following window appears.

13. If you would like to change the printer name you may. Otherwise, click OK. The desktop printer is created and configured and the following progress indicator appears.

94 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

When the printer is successfully created, the following message appears.

14. Click OK. The printer icon appears on your desktop.

15. You may now print your jobs using this printer through a TCP/IP protocol.

Printing from Linux The following procedure describes how to print from Linux to the CXP3535 Color Server using the command line or by defining a printer using the Linux user interface (in this case Red Hat Linux).

Linux Command Line 1. Open a Terminal window (System Tools>Terminal Window).

2. If your Linux computer is not configured with DHCP in the network settings, you will need to add the hostname and TCP/IP address of the CXP3535 Color Server that you want to print to in the /etc/hosts file.

3. Browse to the directory that contains your file(s), and then type the following command (all commands and printer name are case- sensitive). The server name is the name defined in the /etc/hosts file or as the registered name in the DNS server on your network (DHCP use): # lpr P @ For example:

# lpr P OPAL3_ProcessPrint@opal3 letter.ps

Note: You do not need to use the CXP3535 Color Server PPD when printing from Linux.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 95

4. Press ENTER. Your file is then printed to the CXP3535 Color Server.

Linux user interface The following procedure reflects Red Hat Linux version 8.0

1. Select System Settings>Printing.

2. Click New to add a setup a new LPR/LPD printer.

3. In the Add A New Print Queue window, click Forward.

96 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

4. In the Set the Print Queue Name and Type window, type a name for the printer that you will be able to identify on your computer, for example, OPAL3_LPR.

5. Click Forward.

6. In the Configure a Unix Print Queue window, type the CXP3535 Color Server name in the Server: box, for example, OPAL3. In the Queue box, type the exact name of the network printer you wish to print to (you can view the exact name of the printer on the CXP3535 Color Server, under Admin>Resource Manager>Virtual Printers).

In this example the Printer name is OPAL3_ProcessPrint.

7. Click Forward.

LPR Printing with the CXP3535 Color Server 97

8. In the Select a Printer Driver, select the PostScript Printer, and then click Forward.

9. In the Finish, and Create the New Print Queue window click Apply.

10. In the Red Hat Printer Config window, click Apply.

98 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

11. When prompted, click OK. The new LPR/LPD printer is now listed with your other printers on the Linux computer and you are now ready to print to the CXP3535 Color Server using the LPR/LPD.

Defining a Printer on Unix Client Workstations

AIX and UNIX Command Line

To define an AIX 4.2.1 printer for printing through LPR:

1. On your UNIX workstation (for example, AIX 4.2.1), type SMIT and follow the sequence: Print Spooling>Add a Print Queue> remote>Standard processing.

2. In Name of QUEUE to add, type the name of the print queue to be used on your UNIX client (use a logical name to recognize the remote printer).

3. In HOSTNAME of remote server, type the hostname of the remote server where the printer is defined (for example CXP3535).

4. In Name of QUEUE on remote server, type the exact name of the print queue defined on the remote server (for example ProcessPrint).

5. Click OK.

Note: Verify that the printer name defined on the remote server contains no more than 20 characters. Unix is case sensitive.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 99

Printing from a UNIX Client Workstation

To print from a UNIX client through LPR:

1. Type the following: <-P> For example, to print frog.ps on a printer named ProcessPrint, type: lpr -P ProcessPrint frog.ps.

2. Press ENTER. The PostScript file is downloaded to the printer. All settings are taken from the remote printer on the CXP3535 Color Server.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration This appendix describes how to configure the connection between a Novell NDS (Novell Directory Services) Server and the CXP3535 Color Server, in a Novell working environment.

To configure this connection, the following procedures are preformed:

1. Creating the Novell NDS Print Server "nwprintserver" in the Novell NDS.

2. Creating a Novell NDS Printer object in the Novell NDS.

Note: Use alphanumeric and underscores for names. Names are case sensitive, for example, ProcessPrint not processprint. UNIX does not require PPDs to print jobs.

Important: The Novell client should also be installed in the CXP3535 Color Server since it is not installed by default.

For further information see Installing and Configuring Novell Client for Spire on page 492.

Note: All the following procedures should be performed on a Windows client running the Novell Client, and configured by the Novell Administrator to access the NWAdmin program.

100 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

3. Creating the Print Queues and in the Novell NDS.

4. Verifying the connection information.

5. Configuring the IPX Printing parameters: Tree and Context, using the CXP3535 Color Server Administration window (Network Setup/IPX Printing) in the CXP3535 Color Server.

6. Installing the Printer Drivers on a Novell Client.

To perform these procedures, you need:

Administrative permissions assigned by the Novell Administrator.

The User Name and Password for access to the Novell NDS Server.

An account in the appropriate NDS Tree and Context with permissions to create objects.

The full Context (location in the NDS Tree) where you will be creating the Print Server, Printer and Print Queues.

Background and know-how of Novell NDS Server.

Defining Novell NDS Printer Queues in the Novell NDS Tree

Using the Novell NetWare Administrator Application Perform the following procedures to create the Print Server, Printer and Print Queues, using the NWAdmin application:

1. Define the Novell NDS Print Server, Printer and Print Queue in the Novell NDS Tree.

2. Assign the Printer to the Print Server and the Print Queues to the Printer.

3. Check the Print Layout to verify the connections and perform a test print.

Note: Both and queues should be defined even if you plan to use only one Printer queue. These print queues are the only supported Novell print queues.

Important: The detailed procedures follow; perform these procedures in the specified order.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 101

To open the Netware Administrator Application:

Open the Netware Administrator Application (provided by your Novell Administrator). The NetWare Administrator window appears displaying the Novell NDS window. The following example shows the existing Trees, Queues and other Novell connections.

102 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

To define a Novell NDS Print Server:

1. From the Novell NDS window, select the required Context.

2. From the Object menu, select Create. The New Object dialog box appears.

3. From the Class of new object list, select Print Server.

4. Click OK. The Create Print Server dialog box appears.

5. In the Print Server name box, type nwprintserver.

Note: Before performing the following procedure, check the Novell Server window and if the nwprintserver already exists, proceed to the next procedure To define a Novell NDS printer: on page 103.

Note: In Novell v5.0 NDS, the words Non NDPS also appear.

Note: It is important to use only this server name, in lower case. In any case, do not define a password for the Print Server.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 103

6. Click the Create button. The Novell NDS nwprintserver printer is created and appears in the Novell NDS window.

To define a Novell NDS printer:

1. From the Object menu, select Create. The New Object dialog box appears.

2. From the Class of new object list, select Printer.

Note: In Novell v5.0 NDS, the words Non NDPS also appear.

104 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

3. Click OK. The Create Printer dialog box appears.

4. In the Printer name box, type any printer name, for example Spire_Printer.

5. Click the Create button. The printer name is added to the Novell NDS window.

To define the Novell NDS Print Queues:

1. From the Object menu, select Create. The New Object dialog box appears.

Note: Both and queues should be defined. Only these print queues are supported. Prior to performing this procedure, verify that in the CXP3535 Color Server, both network printers and are present. Both Virtual printers and should not be deleted from the CXP3535 Color Server.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 105

2. From The Class Of New Object List, select Print Queue.

3. Click OK. The Create Print Queue dialog box appears.

4. Verify that Directory Service Queue is selected.

5. In the Print Queue name box, type the exact (case sensitive) Virtual Printer name: . For example: Spire7_ProcessPrint.

6. Select the Create another Print Queue check-box.

7. Click the Print Queue Volume icon. The Select Object dialog box appears.

106 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

8. Select any existing volume.

9. Click OK. The Print Queue volume name appears in the Print Queue Volume box, in the Create Print Queue dialog box.

10. In the Create Print Queue dialog box, click the Create button. The Print Queue is now added to the Novell NDS window along with the nwprintserver and the Printer name (Spire_Printer).

11. In the Create Print Queue dialog box, verify that Directory Service queue is selected.

12. Clear the Create another Print Queue check-box.

13. In the Print Queue name box, type the exact (case sensitive) second Virtual Printer name: . For example: Spire7_ProcessStore.

14. Click the Print Queue Volume icon. The Select Object dialog box appears.

15. Select any existing volume.

16. Click OK. The Print Queue volume name appears in the Print Queue Volume box, in the Create Print Queue dialog box.

Note: Notice that the Create Print Queue dialog box re-appears for the second Print Queue to be defined.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 107

17. Click the Create button. Both queues appear now in the Novell NDS window.

108 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

To assign a Printer name to nwprintserver Print Server:

1. In the Novell NDS window, double-click nwprintserver. The Print Server dialog box appears.

2. Click the Assignments button to open the Assignments tab.

3. Click the Add button.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 109

The Select Object dialog box appears.

4. From the printers, select the printer name you have defined (Spire_Printer in our example), and click OK. The printer appears in the Printers list in the Print Server dialog box.

110 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

5. Click OK.

To assign a print queue to the printer:

1. In the Novell NDS window, double-click the Printer name you have defined (in our example Spire_Printer). The Printer dialog box appears.

2. Click the Assignments button to open the Assignments tab.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 111

3. Click the Add button. The Select Object dialog box appears.

4. Select the Queue name you have defined, and click OK.

5. Click the Add button and select .

112 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

Both printer queues now appear in the Print queues list in the Printer dialog box.

6. Click OK.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 113

To verify the new Novell NDS layout:

1. In the Novell NDS window, double-click nwprintserver. The Print Server dialog box appears.

2. Select the Print Layout tab.

3. Verify that the nwprintserver server, the printer and queues are displayed as shown in the above example.

4. Click the Cancel button.

114 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

Using the Novell NDS PConsole The CXP3535 Color Server Virtual Printers can be defined as Novell NDS Printer Queues at the Novell NDS Server, using the Novell NDS PConsole. This procedure includes the following stages:

To use the Novell NDS PConsole:

1. In the CXP3535 Color Server, verify that the two Virtual printers and are present.

2. In the Novell NDS PConsole:

Create the Novell NDS Print Server "nwprintserver".

Create the Novell NDS Printer object.

Create the Novell NDS Print Queues and .

3. In the CXP3535 Color Server:

Configure the IPX Printing parameters: Tree and Context (the exact tree name and the full context path name) using the CXP3535 Color Server Admin tool (General SetUp/IPX Printing).

Restart the CXP3535 Color Server Application.

4. Install the Novell Printer Queue on the Novell Client.

Configuring IPX Printing

To setup the CXP3535 Color Server IPX parameter:

1. In the CXP3535 Color Server workspace, click the Admin button. The Administration window appears.

2. Double click Network Setup to expand the folder.

Notes:

1. It is important to use only this server name, in lower case.

2. In any case, do not define a password for the Print Server.

Note: If the context and tree were defined during the Novell configuration process, these do not need to be defined again.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 115

3. Double click IPX Printing. The IPX Printing dialog box appears.

4. Type the exact Tree parameter and the full containers path of the Context parameter, in their respective boxes. You may also click the Browse button and browse to the required Tree and Path.

5. Click OK.

6. Restart the CXP3535 Color Server Software Application.

116 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

Installing the Printer Drivers on a Novell Client Using the Adobe PS Application

To install the printer drivers on a Novell Client:

1. Use the Adobe PS Application with the CXP3535 Color Server PPD (provided in the CXP3535 Color Server, Utility folder).

2. In the Adobe PS Wizard, verify that you have selected the Novell Printer Queue from the NetWare Network, and not the CXP3535 Color Server Virtual printers. See the following example.

Following is an example of the Printers window after installing the Novell Printer Queue.

Note: The Novell Printer has the Novell NDS name as an extension, e.g. NW_TANSRV5.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 117

3. Perform a test print using the installed Novell NetWare printer.

Defining the CXP3535 Color Server as a Novell NDS Client The following procedure is performed only to connect the CXP3535 Color Server to Novell NDS, as a Novell client. You do not need to perform this procedure in order to print to the CXP3535 Color Server.

To define the CXP3535 Color Server as a Novell NDS Client:

1. Right-click Network Neighborhood icon on the CXP3535 Color Server desktop, and from the menu, select NetWare Login. The Novell Login dialog box appears.

2. Type the Username and Password in their corresponding boxes; this information is provided by the Novell Administrator.

Note: If the connection between the CXP3535 Color Server and the Novell Server has already been defined, verify the connection by following this procedure.

118 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

3. Click the Advanced button to expand the dialog box.

4. In the NDS tab, click the Trees button. The Tree window appears.

5. Select the required tree and click OK. The tree appears in the Tree box in the NDS tab.

Novell NDS Setup and Configuration 119

6. In the NDS tab, click the Contexts button. The context window appears.

7. Select the required context full containers path, and click OK. The Context full containers path appears in the Context box in the NDS tab.

8. In the NDS tab, click the Servers button. The server window appears.

9. Select the required Server, and click OK. The Server appears in the Server box in the NDS tab.

Note: An optional way is to type the exact Tree name, the Context full container path and the Server exact name, in their corresponding boxes. These names are provided by the Novell Administrator.

120 Chapter 3 Setting Up Client Workstations

10. Click OK in the Novell Login dialog box. A Results window appears briefly to indicate that the connection was established. If an error message appears instead, contact your Novell Administrator.

The CXP3535 Color Server is now defined as a Novell NDS client.

Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Introduction....................................................................................122

Printing from the CXP3535 Color Server .........................................122

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server .....................126

Adjusting Job Parameters Post-RIP...................................................221

122 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Introduction This chapter explains how to import files to the CXP3535 Color Server for printing and set job parameters using the Job Parameters window. It also provides detailed information on the various job parameters.

This chapter also explains how to reprint files from the Storage Folder and how to adjust job parameters post RIP.

Printing from the CXP3535 Color Server

Importing Files You may easily import PDL files that reside on client workstations that are connected to the network and files that are available only on an external media (such as a CD-ROM). It is also possible to import job files that reside locally on the CXP3535 Color Server.

To import files to the CXP3535 Color Server:

1. In the CXP3535 Color Server workspace, from the Job menu, select Import Job. The Import Job window appears.

Printing from the CXP3535 Color Server 123

2. To access the required files, click the up one level button, or double- click on the file folders to go down the file tree.

3. Select the required files and click the Add to List button. Or: Drag the files to the right hand side of the Import Job window.

4. Select a printer from the Virtual Printer list.

5. Click Submit. All files currently listed on the right hand side of the Import Job window are sent to the CXP3535 Color Server to be processed and printed as defined in the selected virtual printer.

To check the status of imported jobs:

1. Click on the arrow in the DFE and Printer Animation. The Importing/Retrieving window appears.

The Importing/Retrieving window indicates the name of the file being imported, its location and the job size. It also indicates the percentage of the job already transferred, both numerically and graphically.

Note: use SHIFT or CTRL to select several files or CTRL+A to select all the files. To add only one file, double-click on its name. If required, add the same file more than once.

Notes:

1. To remove files, select the required files in the right hand side of the Import Job window and click the Remove button.

2. Use SHIFT or CTRL to select several files at once.

3. If the selected virtual printer is a SpoolStore printer (and in some cases a ProcessStore printer) the file will arrive to the CXP3535 Color Server Storage Folder.

124 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

2. Select one of the following options:

Click Skip This Job to stop importing the current file and import the next job in the import queue.

Click Abort All Jobs to stop importing all the files.

Click Close to close the Importing/Retrieving window.

Reprinting Files RTP jobs that are stored in the Storage Folder can be easily reprinted. Select the job you want to reprint and submit it. It is automatically placed in the In Print queue.

The CXP3535 Color Server enables you to change job parameters and edit jobs prior to reprinting.

You can change job parameters in the Job Parameters window. Certain changes to the job parameters require re-RIPing of the job. The CXP3535 Color Server automatically determines if your file requires re-RIPing and places it in the appropriate queue when you submit it for reprinting.

Jobs edited using the Job Editor cannot be re-RIPped. Once a job has been saved in the Job Editor, it is a new RTP file without an associated PDL file. Therefore, parameters requiring re-RIPing cannot be applied.

For further details see Storage Folder on page 332.

See Adjusting Job Parameters Post-RIP on page 221.

For further details on editing RTP jobs, see Editing RTP Jobs on page 359.

Printing from the CXP3535 Color Server 125

Submitting an RTP Job Requiring no Changes

To submit an RTP job requiring no changes:

Select the jobs in the Storage Folder and from the Job menu select Submit. Or: Right-click the jobs and from the menu select Submit. The job/s are placed in the appropriate queue (In Process or In Print queue).

Submitting a Job that Requires re-RIPing

To submit a job that requires re-RIPing:

1. Double-click the job to open the Job Parameters window.

2. Change the required parameter and click the Submit button. The CXP3535 Color Server automatically determines if your job needs to be re-RIPped and places it in the appropriate queue.

Note: Use SHIFT or CTRL to select several jobs.

126 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server The CXP3535 Color Server enables you to view and edit all of the job parameters using the Job Parameters window.

Job Parameters Window

To open the Job Parameters window:

Double-click a job in the Storage Folder. Or: Right-click the job in the Storage Folder, and from the menu select Job Parameters. The Job Parameters window appears.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 127

The Job Parameters window title bar shows the following:

Senders (originating workstations) user ID

Job submission date and time

Job size

The Job Parameters window contains the following tabs:

Print Settings

Paper Stock

Print Quality

Color

Imposition

Services

Finishing

Exception

These tabs and their job parameters are detailed in the following sections.

128 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The Print Settings Tab The Print Settings tab enables you to set print-related job parameters such as the print range, the number of copies you would like to print, the print method, order and delivery. In addition you may define the collation, the image position on the sheet, the image scale, set the gallop workflow if required, or rotate your job.

No. of Copies

To set the number of copies:

In the Number of Copies box, type the required number of copies to be printed.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 129

Print Range

To set the print range, select one of the following options:

Select All to print the entire job.

Select Odd Pages to print all odd pages.

Select Even Pages to print all even pages.

Select Pages and specify the pages to be printed as follows:

Type one or several numbers separated by commas and no spaces. For example, 1,3,5.

Type a range of pages with a hyphen between the starting and ending numbers in the range. For example, 1-5.

Note: For imposed jobs, instead of typing the required pages, you should type the required imposed sheets.

130 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

VI Print Range

If the printed job is a VI job, the Print range options display as follows:

To set the print range for a VI job, select one of the following options:

Select All to print all booklets.

Select Odd Pages to print all odd booklets.

Select Even Pages to print all even booklets.

Select the Booklets option and type the specific booklets to print: you may type a range of booklets to be printed, and / or the number of individual booklets to be printed. For example 5-7, 10 will print booklets 5 through 7, and booklet 10.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 131

Print Method

To set the print method, select one of the following options:

To print single-sided pages, select Simplex.

To print normal book-style hard copies, select Duplex Head to Head (usually used with portrait jobs).

To print calendar-style hard copies, select Duplex Head to Toe (usually used with landscape jobs).

132 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

To print using the manual duplex method:

Select Manual Duplex.

Click Submit. All of the job first side pages are processed and printed.

When the first side of the job has completed printing the following message appears.

Place the printed pages facing up in the bypass tray and then click Continue to print the second side. The second side of the job is printed.

Note: If you selected Face up, the odd pages are printed first (on side I). If you selected Face down, the even pages are printed first (on side 1).

Notes:

1. Manual duplex is available using the bypass tray only (tray 5).

2. For Manual Duplex printing, Admin pages, Front/Back covers slip sheets, and other page exceptions are unavailable.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 133

Print Order

To set the print order, select one of the following options:

To print the document from the first page to the last page, select From 1 to N.

To print the document from the last page to the first page, select From N to 1.

134 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Delivery

To set the delivery options, select one of the following options:

To deliver the pages facing down, select Face Down.

To deliver the pages facing up, select Face Up.

Note: Simplex Face up is unavailable on the CXP3535 Color Server.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 135

Collation

To set the collation, select one of the following options:

To print a complete copy of the job before the first page of the next copy is printed, from the Collation options select Yes.

To print all the copies of each page before all the copies of the next page are printed, from the Collation options select No.

Image Position

You can adjust the image positioning on the sheets printed page (simplex or duplex).

136 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

This function uses the following terminology:

Lead (or Leading Edge) the edge of a sheet at which printing begins.

Rear (or Rear Edge)sheet's edge near the printer rear, where printing stops)

The pages Lead and Rear edges are determined just after the page is printed out before making any change in the page orientation.

To adjust the image positioning in duplex printing, do one of the following:

Select the Same on both sides check box, to shift the image on the sheets second side (face down image) according to the previous shift on the sheets first side (face up image). Set page offsets by clicking the directional arrows or by typing Rear and Lead values.

Click the Center Image button to delete all values input in the numerator, setting each value back to 0.

Clicking the arrows to shift the image of both sides. Or type values in the Rear and Lead boxes.

Clicking on the arrows changes the numerator values as following:

Positive (negative) values for shift toward (away from) the Leading Edge

Top (bottom) arrows for positive (negative) values toward (away from) the Rear Edge

Note: Use this option to move duplex page data away from the spine. This option is not available if the Print Method is Simplex.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 137

Image Scale

The default value in the Image Scale parameter is 100% of the original file.

To proportionally enlarge or reduce the size of the job pages, select one of the following options:

Select Fit to Paper for the image to fit the selected paper in the paper stock.

Select Custom and type the percent (between 25-400%) by which you would like to proportionally decrease / increase the image size.

138 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Rotate 180

The Rotate 180 parameter enables you to rotate your job.

To rotate your job:

From the Rotate 180 options, select Yes.

Gallop

The Gallop workflow enables you to begin printing a defined number of pages before the entire job has been RIPped. This enables you to print and RIP concurrently.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 139

Gallop reduces the amount of time required to RIP and print a job and is especially useful for long runs such as VI jobs. When combined with a Deletion policy, Gallop enables you to free Printer disk space.

Gallop is not recommended for relatively small jobs, since the benefit of engaging the process is marginal, and the total production time will be shortened by few seconds only.

To set the gallop, select one of the following options:

For small jobs, select No. The job will be RIPped completely before printing.

For long run jobs, select Yes and indicate the number of pages to be RIPped before printing begins.

Note: The default number of pages to be RIPped before printing begins is 50. For complicated jobs using numerous shared elements, you may increase/ decrease this number.

140 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The Paper Stock Tab The Paper Stock tab enables you to set paper stock-related job parameters.

The CXP3535 Color Server uses multiple paper stock parameters such as paper size, media type and tray to specify the paper stock.

If the selected paper is unavailable, the current job freezes until the appropriate set is available (the job receives a frozen status icon, its line appears in blue and a message appears in the Alerts window). Other jobs can print while jobs are in the frozen state.

Paper Size

To select the paper size:

1. From the Size list, select the required stock size.

2. For a custom paper size setting, select Custom from the list.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 141

The Paper size options are displayed as follows.

3. Type the required Height and Width.

4. Select the required feed direction:

LEF (Long Edge Feed)

SEF (Short Edge Feed)

Note: Units of measurement (mm or inches) reflect system configuration. They are chosen in the Administration window.

142 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Media Type

The Media Type parameter includes the paper weight and the paper type.

To define the media type:

1. From the Media Type list, select Use Printer Settings to use the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer default media type. Or: Select the required media type.

2. If you selected Transparency, the Media Type options displays as follows.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 143

a. Select the Add Interleaves check box if you want to add also an interleave after the transparency.

b. From the Paper Size list, select the required paper size.

c. From the Media Type list, select the required media type.

d. From the Tray list, select the required tray.

Tray

To select the required tray:

From the Tray options list, select Auto to select the required paper stock from all paper trays. Or: Select the required tray.

Note: The default values are those of the job.

Note: The Auto tray option uses the paper in the selected tray only if it complies with all the other paper stock parameters. If the paper stock in the assigned tray mismatches with any Job Stock parameter, the job becomes frozen.

Important: If you have selected a duplex template in the Imposition tab, selecting Tray 5 (Bypass tray) will require manual duplex printing.

144 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The Print Quality Tab The Print Quality tab enables you to set print quality related job parameters and to improve the quality of printed jobs. These parameters include the possibility to enhance text/ line quality and image quality. In addition it enables you to apply the Creo FAF algorithm by setting trapping, to define the black overprint, to use or ignore the overprint information by setting the PS overprint, and set the image noise level.

Text / Line Quality

Text / Line Quality refers to the Creo anti-aliasing algorithm for superior text quality. Text / Line Quality and text and line-art elements are processed separately to produce optimal rendering of all the elements on a page. This option improves the text quality of diagonal lines, borders and blends, causes blends to appear smooth with no banding and displays crisp diagonal lines without (or with minimal) jaggies (rough edges) that are the result of the limited resolution of the print engine.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 145

To set the text/line quality, select one of the following options:

To provide superior text quality, from the Text/Line quality options, select High.

To provide regular text quality, select Normal.

Normal (with jaggies) High

Note: Anti-aliasing is used to avoid or minimize jaggies - rough edges which are the result of the limited resolution of the original file.

Note: Selecting Normal increases the processing speed.

146 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Image Quality

Image Quality refers to the ability to maintain the same detail and smoothness with different degrees of enlargement. This feature is especially useful when your PostScript file includes several images at different qualities (for example, images that were scanned at different resolutions, were rotated, or downloaded from the internet).

To set the image quality, select one of the following:

To improve the quality of images in a job, select High.

To provide normal image quality (for jobs that do not require improved picture quality), select Normal.

Note: Selecting Normal increases the processing speed.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 147

Trapping

Trapping is a solution that solves mis-registration between color separations in both offset and digital printing. This occurs no matter the accuracy of the printing device, and results in white lines around objects on top of a background (in a knock-out procedure) and also between adjacent colors. The solution is to extract the element and/or the background in order to create an overlap between them.

See the following illustration for the trappings effect:

This function uses the following terminology:

Frame Thickness refers to the thickness of Trapping. The thicker the frame, the less chance that white lines / areas appear between images.

Protect Small Text is an option you may apply for small or complex images, since thicker frames can decrease quality by hiding parts of an image. Selecting this option will protect any text smaller or equal to 12 pt. by not framing it while applying the FAF algorithm.

Printed without Trapping Printed with Trapping

148 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

To set the trapping, select one of the following options:

From the Trapping options, select Yes.

a. In the Frame Thickness box, select the default (0.08) for the thickness of the trapping frame, or type the required value.

b. Select the Protect Small Text check box so that any text that is smaller or equal to 12 pt. is not framed during FAF. Or: Clear this option to frame all text elements during FAF.

To not trap the job while RIPing, from the Trapping options, select No.

Black Overprint

Occasionally, white lines may appear around black text. The text may appear less dense than required as a result of misregistration between color separations. Black Overprint is used to ensure that black text prints cleanly within a tint or picture area. The text appears in a richer, deeper black, with the underlying CMY values equal to those of the printed background.

A knock-out occurs when you print only the topmost color. This results in lesser color density and can cause misregistration if separations are not perfectly aligned. When Black Overprint is active, there are no knock-outs

Note: This does not affect trapping incorporated by DTP applications (for example, Photoshop). FAF should not be used with application based trapping. Therefore, if a PostScript file already contains trapping from the originating application, it is not necessary to use CXP3535 Color Server trapping. In this case, select No.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 149

under the black text. Black Overprint prints text over coated backgrounds rather than knocking out the background first. As a result, misregistrations are not visible. It is therefore recommended to use Black Overprint in order to ensure best results when printing black text and graphics.

To set black overprint, select on the following options:

To enable black overprint, from the Black overprint options, select Yes (Black Overprint applies only to 100% black).

To disable black overprint, from the Black overprint options, select No (Selecting No increases the processing speed).

PS Overprint

In the client authoring tools (for example QuarkXPress), you can select overprint options. PS Overprint offers the option to use the overprint, which exists in the PS file. It also determines whether the DTP application PS (PostScript) Overprint settings are honored in the RIP.

The CXP3535 Color Server settings override PS Overprint commands from DTP applications. For example, if PS Overprint has been set to Yes in a DTP application, selecting PS Overprint No in the CXP3535 Color Server results in no overprinting. The CXP3535 Color Server can not create PS Overprint that is not pre-defined in the file. Selecting PS Overprint Yes (default) for a file that has not had overprinting defined in a DTP application results in no overprinting.

150 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

If you choose to honor the PS overprint applied in a DTP application, it is implemented by the CXP3535 Color Server and background colors are not knocked out. For example, in the case of a yellow triangle overlapping a cyan circle, selecting Yes results in the overlapping area turning green. This is not seen on the screen, only in print.

If you choose to override the PS overprint information that exists in the input PostScript file, background colors are knocked out and only the top most color parts are seen on the screen in your DTP application. For example, in the case of a yellow triangle overlapping a cyan circle, selecting No results in the cyan background being knocked out, so only the yellow is printed.

To set the PS overprint, select one of the following options:

To use the overprint information that exists in the input file, from the PS Overprint options, select Yes.

To ignore the overprint information that exists in the input file, from the PS Overprint options, select No.

Image Noise

The Image Noise parameter, enables you to smoothen and blend vignettes of continuous tone (CT) images.

Note: The above is true for files with PS Overprint Yes already selected in the DTP application.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 151

By default the Image Noise parameter is disabled.

To set the image noise level:

1. From the Image noise options, select Yes.

2. Change the image noise level (if required) by moving the slider. The higher the level, the smoother the vignettes appear.

152 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The Color Tab

The Color tab enables you to apply last-minute color corrections, or to set the output job to match other output devices. Among the available options are: setting the color mode, setting the brightness or contrast, applying the gray component replacement (GCR), and selecting the required destination profile. In addition you may select the required gradation and calibration tables and the required screening method, or choose an RGB/ CMYK Workflow.

Color Mode

The Color Mode parameter enables you to print color jobs in black and white using the black toner only. When a color job is printed using the Grayscale option, the Cyan (C), Magenta (M), and Yellow (Y) separations are also printed in Black (K) toner, giving a dense appearance similar to the CMYK grayscale image.

While printing color jobs using the Color option, you may also select the Print grays using black toner check box, so that RGB gray images will be printed using black toner only (for gray CMYK elements to be printed using black toner only, you need to select Perceptual as the rendering intent). Use this option if you have a mixed document (containing some pages in color and some pages in grayscale only) or a mixed page (using both color and grayscale images / texts).

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 153

To set the color mode:

1. Select Grayscale to print the job as black and white using Black (K) toner only. Or: Select Color to print the job in color using CMYK.

2. If you have selected Color, you may select the Print grays using black toner check box, to print RGB gray images using black toner only.

RGB Workflow

The RGB Workflow parameter enables you to select a profile for printing images defined with a profile set in the DTP application that supports ICC color management, and also specify the required rendering intent for RGB elements.

This function uses the following terminology:

CSA (Color Space Array) is the spectrum of specific variants of a color model with a specific gamut or color range. For example, within the color model RGB, there are numerous color spaces (such as: Apple RGB, sRGB, and Adobe RGB). While each of these define color by the same three axes (R, G, and B), they differ in gamut and other specifications. CSA is comprised of a three-dimensional geometric

Note: Grayscale images created in RGB applications (such as PowerPoint) should be specified as Monochrome or submitted to the system with Grayscale selected in the PPD. This selection ensures that grayscale images are counted as B&W instead of Colorin both the CXP3535 Color Server and in the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer billing meters.

154 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

representation of colors that can be seen / generated using a certain color model and are quantitatively measured. Source CSA is to be used only under the assumption that the upstream color workflow was managed and monitored. Otherwise it should be replaced with a Creo profile, which is the default.

CSA Profiles - There are three CSA profiles with gammas of 1.8, 2.1 and 2.4. The higher the gamma, the darker the RGB appears. This workflow should be used when you have images from different sources (such as: digital cameras, Internet, and scanners) and you want the images to have the common RGB color spaces.

Rendering Intent - All printers, monitors and scanners have a gamut or range of colors that they can output (or view in the case of a scanner). If a color needs to be output and is outside the gamut of the output device, it must be mapped or approximated to some other color, which exists within the gamut. Rendering Intent enables you to compress out-of-gamut colors into the color capability of the press you are using. You can set any rendering intent value for RGB elements by selecting the required from the Rendering intent options list. The default value for RGB is Perceptual. The default value for CMYK is Relative Colorimetric. There are several methods that can be used when translating colors from one color space to another. These methods are called Rendering Intents because they are optimized for various uses. When working with ICC profiles, it is important that you select the Rendering Intent that best preserves the important aspects of the image. Each rendering method specifies a CRD for color conversions. You can modify the rendering method to control the appearance of images, such as prints from office applications or RGB photographs from Photoshop.

Relative Colorimetric - a rendering intent method in whichcolors that fall within the output color space remain the same. Only colors that fall outside are changed to the closest possible color within the output color space.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 155

When using this method, some closely related colors in the input color space can be mapped to a single color in the output color space. This reduces the number of colors in the image.

Absolute Colorimetric - a rendering intent method similar to Relative Colorimetric except that it does not make adjustments according to the white point. In this method, colors that do not fit within the output color space are rendered at the extremes of the output color space. Colors that fall inside the output color space are matched very accurately. This method is valuable for representing "signature colors". Colors that are highly identified with a commercial product such as the cyan in the Creo logo.

Saturated (presentation) - a rendering intent method which scales all colors to the strongest saturation possible. The relative saturation is maintained from one color space to another.

156 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

This rendering style option is optimal for artwork and graphs in presentations. In many cases, this style option can be used for mixed pages that contain both presentation graphics and photographs.

Perceptual (default for RGB) - a rendering intent method which preserves the visual relationship among the colors as they are perceived by the human eye. In other words, all colors are proportionally scaled to fit the output gamut. All or most colors in the original are changed but the relationship between them does not change.

This method is recommended when working with realistic images such as photographs, including scans and images from stock photography CDs.

To select an RGB workflow, select one of the following options:

To use the source CSA RGB profile, select Use Source CSA profile (uses the embedded CSA).

To use a Spire source CSA RGB profile, select Replace with and select the required CSA from the list.

To set the rendering intent, select one of the following options:

Select Relative Colorimetric when a color in the current color space is out of gamut in the target color space, so that it is mapped to the closest possible color within the gamut of the target color space, while colors that are in gamut are not affected. Relative Colorimetric rendering does not incorporate paper tint in the rendering.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 157

Only the colors that fall outside of the destination gamut are changed. This rendering can cause two colors, which appear different in the source color space, to be the same in the target color space.

Select Absolute Colorimetric so that colors match exactly with no adjustment made for white point or black point that would alter the image's brightness. Absolute Colorimetric rendering does include paper tint in the rendering. Absolute Colorimetric is valuable for rendering "signature colors", those colors that are identified with a commercial product.

Select Saturated (presentation) to reproduce the original image color saturation (vividness) when converting into the target device's color space. In this approach, the relative saturation of colors is maintained from gamut to gamut. This rendering is primarily designed for business graphics, where the exact relationship between colors (such as in a photographic image) is not as important as are bright saturated colors.

Select Perceptual to compress the total gamut from one device's color space into the gamut of another device's color space, when one or more colors in the original image is out of the gamut of the destination color space. This rendering preserves the visual relationship between colors by shrinking the entire color space and shifting all colors including those that were in gamut.

158 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

CMYK Workflow

The CMYK Workflow is used to emulate various standards used in lithographic printing. These standards represent specific combinations of paper and ink, as well as popular proofing systems. It is also used to emulate other printing devices such as offset presses, or other digital printers. An example of a CMYK Workflow job would be printing a test sample for a survey before moving to an offset press to print millions of survey forms. In such a case, it is best to emulate the offset before the job actually goes to offset printing.

The CXP3535 Color Server supports two CMYK emulation methods: Device Link (default) and CSA.

If you would like to emulate your CMYKs using the CSA method, change the CMYK emulation method in the Administration window, in the Preferences folder.

The CMYK workflow parameter is also used to specify the required rendering intent for CMYK elements. All printers, monitors and scanners have a gamut or range of colors that they can output (or view in the case of

Note: RGB colors are not affected by the CMYK Workflow.

For further details, see Color - Emulations on page 416.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 159

a scanner). If a color needs to be output and is outside the gamut of the output device, it must be mapped or approximated to some other color, which exists within the gamut.

Rendering Intent enables you to compress out-of-gamut colors into the color capability of the press you are using. You can set any rendering intent value for CMYK elements by selecting the required from the Rendering intent options list. The default value for CMYK is Relative Colorimetric.

In addition, you may also select to emulate the paper tint and adjust the white point value of the used paper stock. For example, if you want to simulate pink paper stock while using white paper stock, you may use the corresponding emulation profile and select the Emulate source paper tint check box. The result will be that in addition to the job emulation, the paper tint will be also emulated and will have a pink shade.

To select a CMYK workflow, select one of the following options:

To use the embedded CSA profile from the PS file, select Use Source CSA.

To replace the source CSA with original CMYK values, select Use Original CMYK values.

To use one of the Creo predefined CMYK emulation profiles, select Emulation (Device Link) and from the list select the required emulation.

To emulate also the original paper tint, select the Emulate source paper tint check box.

Note: If you select the Device Link Emulation profile, you cannot select a rendering intent since for each device link emulation profile a rendering intent is already defined.

Note: The system emulates the selected option during the RIP process. GCR and CMYK Emulation do not affect the processed job.

Note: The Emulate source paper tint check box is enabled only if you select the Device Link emulation profile. When the Emulate source paper tint check box is selected, the rendering intent that will be used is Absolute Colorimetric. If the job is simplex, only the front side will be printed using the tint emulation.

160 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

To set the rendering intent, select one of the following options:

Select Relative Colorimetric when a color in the current color space is out of gamut in the target color space, so that it is mapped to the closest possible color within the gamut of the target color space, while colors that are in gamut are not affected. Relative Colorimetric rendering does not incorporate paper tint in the rendering. Only the colors that fall outside of the destination gamut are changed. This rendering can cause two colors, which appear different in the source color space, to be the same in the target color space.

Select Absolute Colorimetric so that colors match exactly with no adjustment made for white point or black point that would alter the image's brightness. Absolute Colorimetric rendering does include paper tint in the rendering. Absolute Colorimetric is valuable for rendering "signature colors", those colors that are identified with a commercial product.

Select Saturated (presentation) to reproduce the original image color saturation (vividness) when converting into the target device's color space. In this approach, the relative saturation of colors is maintained from gamut to gamut. This rendering is primarily designed for business graphics, where the exact relationship between colors (such as in a photographic image) is not as important as are bright saturated colors.

Select Perceptual to compress the total gamut from one device's color space into the gamut of another device's color space, when one or more colors in the original image is out of the gamut of the destination color space. This rendering preserves the visual relationship between colors by shrinking the entire color space and shifting all colors including those that were in gamut.

Note: If you selected the Device Link Emulation profile, you cannot select a rendering intent since for each device link emulation profile a rendering intent is already defined.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 161

Destination Profile

The Destination profile parameter enables you to select the Color Gamut profile of the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer. Currently the only available color profile is SpireDC3535.

To select the destination profile:

From the Destination profile options, select the required profile.

Calibration

The purpose of color Calibration is to achieve a consistent level of color quality. The calibration process corrects printer colors by measuring a chart using a densitometer, which measures color density.

162 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The CXP3535 Color Server Calibration tool enables you to create and edit calibration tables, either through an automatic process or by editing an existing calibration table. The available calibration options are Normal, Saturated and None.

The Calibration parameter enables you to select the required calibration table for the job.

To select a calibration table for a job:

Use the default calibration table Normal. Or: Select a calibration table from the Calibration options list.

Screening Method

Screening Method converts CT (Continuous Tone) and LW (Line Work) images into information (halftone dots) that can be printed. The human eye smooths out this information, which seems visually consistent with the original picture. Thus, the more lines per inch, the more natural the image appears.

For further information, see The Calibration Tool on page 281.

Tip: For optimal printing performance, use the Normal (default) calibration setting (with Medium GCR).

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 163

The CXP3535 Color Server supports Line screening. Screening is achieved by printing lines in an evenly-spaced pattern. The distance between screen lines is fixed and the line thickness varies according to the required strength of color.

Using screens, printers can work with even amounts of toner and still produce a wide range of colors. The darker the color, the thicker the line. In this manner screens are used to give the appearance of different toner quantities printed in a certain area.

The CXP3535 Color Server currently supports the following screening:

Line 200 (default) applies line type screen of 200 lpi. The screen of each separation is printed at a different angle.

Ink Saving (GCR)

Ink Saving GCR (Gray Component Replacement) replaces grays (of a certain percentage of C, M and Y) with Black, which affects the gray component of all colors.

This replacement conserves ink or toner and prevents the consequences of excessive toner buildup, such as flaking and cracking, or the "curling" effect that may occur when printing transparencies.

164 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

While the gray component of each color is replaced by black, there is no change in the color quality of the printed image.

To set the Ink Saving GCR, select one of the following options:

To set the amount of CMY dry inks to be replaced by the black dry ink, from the Ink Saving options, select the required amount of CMY dry inks to be replaced by the black dry ink:

Low

Medium

High

To disable GCR and use maximum dry ink coverage, from the Ink Saving options, use the default option No.

No GCR Low GCR Medium GCR High GCR

Note: Use High to provide low ink coverage while saving on dry ink (this prevents the occasional peeling of ink and the "curling" effect that may occur when printing transparencies).

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 165

Brightness

With Brightness you control how light or dark your image appears.

Brightness is generally used to make last-minute adjustments to the print job after proofing.

To set the brightness, select one of the following:

To apply no brightness, select Normal.

To select a brightness level for a job, move the Brightness slider to the required brightness level (the range starts from Light, which applies -15%, to Dark, which applies +15%).

Lighter Normal Darker

Note: Changing the Brightness level for an RTP job, does not require re-RIPing of the job.

166 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Contrast

Contrast is the ratio between the light tones and the dark tones in an image. If you increase the contrast, highlights become lighter while shadows become darker.

The Contrast parameter is generally used to make last-minute adjustments to the print job after proofing.

To set the contrast, select one of the following:

To apply no contrast, from the Contrast options, select Normal.

To select a contrast level for the print job, move the Contrast options slider to the required contrast level (the range starts from Less which applies -10%, to More which applies +10%).

Less Normal More

Note: Changing the Contrast level for an RTP job, does not require re-RIPing of the job.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 167

Gradations

The Gradations parameter is used whenever it becomes necessary to perform tone corrections when printing a job. These changes in gradation can include brightness, contrast and color balance adjustments throughout the tone range of an entire image, or in specific tone ranges and do not require re-RIP of the job. The gradation tables you create using the CXP3535 Color Server Gradation tool are displayed in the Color tab and may be applied to print jobs.

You can apply the default gradation table or another pre-configured gradation table to a job.

To select a gradation table for a job:

Select None for no gradation table to be applied. Or: Select one of the defined gradation tables from the Gradation options list.

For further information, see The Gradation Tool on page 269.

168 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The Imposition Tab

The Imposition tab is used to set job options related to positioning, folding, trimming and binding of pages.

Whenever possible, imposition settings should be defined before RIPing a job. Changing key imposition settings (for example, template settings) post RIP may require inefficient re-RIPing of jobs. The CXP3535 Color Server only re-RIPs an imposition job when required.

After selecting the Template parameter, a dynamic thumbnail view appears on the lower right hand corner of the Imposition tab. It shows the effect of your parameter choices on the printed sheet. Parameter setting conflicts are indicated.

The thumbnail viewer is used to receive an immediate feedback on the combination of the imposition parameters in the job. If you would like to see the imposed job preview, you may view your job in the Job Editor window, Imposed sheets tab.

Note: The template option and the thumbnail view are not active if you select None as your imposition method.

For further details, see The Thumbnail Viewer on page 174.

For further details, see The Imposed Sheets Tab on page 351.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 169

Method

The Method parameter specifies the finishing of printed sheets. It offers three types of binding: Saddle Stitch, Perfect Bound, and Cut & Stack, and one method that collects pages together on one sheet without binding: Step & Repeat.

After selecting a finishing method, a display icon of the method appears in the right lower right corner of the Imposition tab.

Note: When None is selected, all imposition job parameters are disabled, and the thumbnail viewer does not display an image.

170 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The method options

Step & Repeat

Step & Repeat method is used for printing multiple copies of the same image so it fills up a larger sheet. This method is used mainly for printing business cards etc. (many business cards on one sheet).

Cut & Stack

Within the Step & Repeat method, is the sub-option Cut & Stack. A jobs pages, booklets (personalized set of any number of pages), or books are sorted in a Z-shape. In other words, each stack of pages is sorted in consecutive order. Thus, when stacks are piled one on top of another, the entire job is already sorted up or down.

Saddle Stitch

Saddle Stitch is a book-finishing technique where the pages of a book are attached through stitching or stapling in the spine fold (for example, for brochures).

Note: It is possible to use specific Step & Repeat templates to print several different images on one sheet.

Note: When using the Step & Repeat template for VI jobs, the system prints it in Z-Sorting mode. This mode enables imposed VI jobs to be sorted for Cut & Stack finishing. When using the Step & Repeat template with the Cut & Stack sub-option, the Exceptions tab is disabled.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 171

Perfect Bound

Perfect Bound is a book-finishing technique where the pages of a book are attached through trimming of the spine fold, roughening the edges of the gathered pages and gluing them together (for example, for hardcover books).

To select the optimal finishing method:

For printing multiple copies of the same image so it fills up an entire sheet (for example, for business cards) - select Step & Repeat. For VI and PS jobs, - select Cut & Stack toenable Step & Repeat jobs, to be printed, cut, stacked and bound in the most efficient manner, while preserving the original sorting.

Fora book-finishing technique where the pages of a book are attached through stitching or stapling in the spine fold (for example, for brochures) - select Saddle Stitch.

For a book-finishing technique where the pages of a book are attached through trimming of the spine fold, roughening the edges of the gathered pages and gluing them together (for example, for hardcover books) - select Perfect Bound.

172 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Size

This function uses the following terminology:

Trim size is the size of the finished, trimmed document.

You can adjust your page size by adjusting the trim size.

Orientation specifies the orientation (Portrait or Landscape) for the trim size. If the wrong orientation is specified an unsuitable template may be selected and the job may be cropped as a result.

Note: If you set trim size to be smaller than the page size set in the DTP application, some of the data is cropped. Setting a larger trim size results in a larger border on the printed page.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 173

To define the job size:

1. From the Sheet Size list, select the required paper size. Or: Select Custom, and type the required height in the H box, and the required width in the W box.

2. From the Media Type list, select the required media type.

3. From the Tray list, select the required tray. Or: Select Auto to use any available tray with the selected paper stock.

4. From the Trim Size list, select the required trim size.

5. Select the required orientation: Landscape or Portrait.

Template

A Template is a set of parameters that determines how your finished sheet is printed.

The template includes:

The number of columns and rows of pages on a sheet.

Each pairs first number refers to columns and the second number refers to rows.

174 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Whether the sheet is printed on one side (Simplex) or on both sides (Duplex).

The orientation (portrait or landscape) of the page.

Each Imposition method has its own specific template choices. For example, if you change your Imposition method from Perfect bound to Step & Repeat, your initially selected template no longer fits the new method.

The Template parameter enables you to choose the template you would like to use. The list of available template choices is determined by the selected finishing method.

The Thumbnail Viewer When setting the Template parameter, the thumbnail view continuously updates your selections for trim size, margins and sheet size.

Thumbnail arrows

The page orientation is indicated by the direction of the arrows (which point to the head of the page) and not by the orientation of the numbers.

Green arrows - indicate that the template layout is rotated.

For further details, see Imposition Workflow on page 266.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 175

Blue and black arrows - indicate the direction of the pages on the sheet: blue - head is down (appears only in duplex layout), black - head is up.

Conflicting parameters

Whenever there is any conflict in the imposition parameter settings, an indication to the conflict will appear in the thumbnail view.

Red corners - indicate that the trim size is bigger than the sheet size.

176 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Yellow corners - indicate unsuitable margin settings. For example if the minimum margin size is unsuitable.

Dotted line - conflicting trim size settings (for example, A3 trim for Step & Repeat 2x2 Duplex template) and template settings.

Collating Templates The Step & Repeat method contains a subset of templates called collating templates. Collating templates are used when jobs with different page images are used to fill up a larger sheet. Unlike regular Step & Repeat, where the same images are printed several times on a sheet, with collating

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 177

templates, several images are printed on the same sheet. Collated templates are used for one-time job print runs and are of the form P1-P2-P3, indicating the job pages to be printed on a sheet.

When choosing a template, you should account for other job parameters (for example paper Trim Size, Bleed, Margin, Gutters and Paper Size). Since some of these parameter settings may contradict, the Template Thumbnail enables you to visually check your job as it highlights such conflicts (in red).

Templates are also linked to the chosen imposition method. If you change your imposition method (for example from Perfect Bound to Step & Repeat), your initially selected template may no longer fit the new method. When required, the CXP3535 Color Server automatically substitutes a suitable template for your new method and notifies you that the change has been made.

To select a template:

1. From the Category options, select System to choose a predefined CXP3535 Color Server imposition template. Or: Select User-defined to choose a user defined CXP3535 Color Server imposition template.

2. From the Template list, select an available template.

3. From the Layout list, select the required layout (Duplex, Simplex, Rotated, Non-rotated.)

4. Select the Fit to sheet check box to proportionally increase or decrease the layout in order to fill the entire sheet size.

For further information on User Defined templates, see User Defined Imposition Template on page 406.

Note: If you selected User Defined from the Category options, Layout is unavailable.

178 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

CXP3535 Color Server Predefined Imposition Templates

The CXP3535 Color Server is predefined with the following imposition templates:

Note: DUP refers to Duplex and SIM refers to Simplex.

Step & Repeat Saddle Stitch Perfect Bound Cut & Stack

1x1 DUP HTH 1x2 HTT 1x2 HTT 1x1 DUP HTH

1x1 DUP HTH Rotated 1x2 HTT Rotated 1x2 HTT Rotated 1x1 DUP HTH Rotated

1x1 DUP HTT 2x1 2x1 1x1 DUP HTT

1x1 DUP HTT Rotated 2x1 Rotated 2x1 Rotated 1x1 DUP HTT Rotated

1x1 SIM 2x2 2x2 1x1 SIM

1x1 SIM Rotated 2x2 HTT 2x2 HTT 1x1 SIM Rotated

1x2 DUP HTH 2x2 Rotated 2x2 Rotated 1x2 DUP HTH

1x2 DUP HTH Rotated 2x2 HTT Rotated 2x2 HTT Rotated 1x2 DUP HTH Rotated

1x2 DUP HTT 4x2 4x2 1x2 DUP HTT

1x2 DUP HTT Rotated 4x2 Rotated 4x2 Rotated 1x2 DUP HTT Rotated

1x2 SIM 1x2 SIM

1x2 SIM Rotated 1x2 SIM Rotated

1x2 North South Sim 1x2 North South Sim

1x2 North South Sim Rotated

1x2 North South Sim Rotated

1x2 North South DUP HTH

1x2 North South DUP HTH

1x2 North South DUP HTH Rotated

1x2 North South DUP HTH Rotated

1x2 North South DUP HTT

1x2 North South DUP HTT

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 179

1x2 North South DUP HTT Rotated

1x2 North South DUP HTT Rotated

1x3 DUP HTH 1x3 DUP HTH

1x3 DUP HTH Rotated 1x3 DUP HTH Rotated

1x3 DUP HTT 1x3 DUP HTT

1x3 DUP HTT Rotated 1x3 DUP HTT Rotated

1X3 SIM 1X3 SIM

1X3 SIM Rotated 1X3 SIM Rotated

2x1 DUP HTH 2x1 DUP HTH

2x1 DUP HTH Rotated 2x1 DUP HTH Rotated

2x1 DUP HTT 2x1 DUP HTT

2x1 DUP HTT Rotated 2x1 DUP HTT Rotated

2x1 SIM 2x1 SIM

2x1 SIM Rotated 2x1 SIM Rotated

2x1 North South Sim 2x1 North South Sim

2x1 North South Sim Rotated

2x1 North South Sim Rotated

2x1 North South DUP HTH

2x1 North South DUP HTH

2x1 North South DUP HTH Rotated

2x1 North South DUP HTH Rotated

2x1 North South DUP HTT

2x1 North South DUP HTT

2x1 North South DUP HTT Rotated

2x1 North South DUP HTT Rotated

2x2 DUP HTH 2x2 DUP HTH

Step & Repeat Saddle Stitch Perfect Bound Cut & Stack

180 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

2x2 DUP HTH Rotated 2x2 DUP HTH Rotated

2x2 DUP HTT 2x2 DUP HTT

2x2 DUP HTT Rotated 2x2 DUP HTT Rotated

2x2 SIM 2x2 SIM

2x2 SIM Rotated 2x2 SIM Rotated

2X5 DUP HTH 2X5 DUP HTH

2X5 DUP HTH Rotated 2X5 DUP HTH Rotated

2x5 DUP HTT 2x5 DUP HTT

2x5 DUP HTT Rotated 2x5 DUP HTT Rotated

2x5 SIM 2x5 SIM

2x5 SIM Rotated 2x5 SIM Rotated

3x1 DUP HTH 3x1 DUP HTH

3x1 DUP HTH Rotated 3x1 DUP HTH Rotated

3x1 DUP HTT 3x1 DUP HTT

3x1 DUP HTT Rotated 3x1 DUP HTT Rotated

3x1 SIM 3x1 SIM

3x1 SIM Rotated 3x1 SIM Rotated

3x2 DUP HTH 3x2 DUP HTH

3x2 DUP HTH Rotated 3x2 DUP HTH Rotated

3x2 DUP HTT 3x2 DUP HTT

3x2 DUP HTT Rotated 3x2 DUP HTT Rotated

3x2 SIM 3x2 SIM

3x2 SIM Rotated 3x2 SIM Rotated

Step & Repeat Saddle Stitch Perfect Bound Cut & Stack

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 181

3x4 DUP HTH 3x4 DUP HTH

3x4 DUP HTH Rotated 3x4 DUP HTH Rotated

3x4 DUP HTT 3x4 DUP HTT

3x4 DUP HTT Rotated 3x4 DUP HTT Rotated

3x4 SIM 3x4 SIM

3x4 SIM Rotated 3x4 SIM Rotated

3x8 DUP HTH 3x8 DUP HTH

3x8 DUP HTH Rotated 3x8 DUP HTH Rotated

3x8 DUP HTT 3x8 DUP HTT

3x8 DUP HTT Rotated 3x8 DUP HTT Rotated

3x8 SIM 3x8 SIM

3x8 SIM Rotated 3x8 SIM Rotated

4x2 DUP HTH 4x2 DUP HTH

4x2 DUP HTH Rotated 4x2 DUP HTH Rotated

4x2 DUP HTT 4x2 DUP HTT

4x2 DUP HTT Rotated 4x2 DUP HTT Rotated

4x2 SIM 4x2 SIM

4x2 SIM Rotated 4x2 SIM Rotated

4x3 DUP HTH 4x3 DUP HTH

4x3 DUP HTH Rotated 4x3 DUP HTH Rotated

4x3 DUP HTT 4x3 DUP HTT

4x3 DUP HTT Rotated 4x3 DUP HTT Rotated

4x3 SIM 4x3 SIM

Step & Repeat Saddle Stitch Perfect Bound Cut & Stack

182 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

4x3 SIM Rotated 4x3 SIM Rotated

4x4 HTH DUP 4x4 HTH DUP

4x4 DUP HTH Rotated 4x4 DUP HTH Rotated

4x4 HTT DUP 4x4 HTT DUP

4x4 DUP HTT Rotated 4x4 DUP HTT Rotated

4x4 SIM 4x4 SIM

4x4 SIM Rotated 4x4 SIM Rotated

5x2 DUP HTH 5x2 DUP HTH

5x2 DUP HTH Rotated 5x2 DUP HTH Rotated

5x2 DUP HTT 5x2 DUP HTT

5x2 DUP HTT Rotated 5x2 DUP HTT Rotated

5x2 SIM 5x2 SIM

5x2 SIM Rotated 5x2 SIM Rotated

5x5 DUP HTH 5x5 DUP HTH

5x5 DUP HTH Rotated 5x5 DUP HTH Rotated

5x5 DUP HTT 5x5 DUP HTT

5x5 DUP HTT Rotated 5x5 DUP HTT Rotated

5x5 SIM 5x5 SIM

5x5 SIM Rotated 5x5 SIM Rotated

8x3 DUP HTH 8x3 DUP HTH

8x3 DUP HTH Rotated 8x3 DUP HTH Rotated

8x3 DUP HTT 8x3 DUP HTT

8x3 DUP HTT Rotated 8x3 DUP HTT Rotated

Step & Repeat Saddle Stitch Perfect Bound Cut & Stack

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 183

Bleed

The Bleed parameter extends part of the printed page image beyond the trimming boundary.

This parameter enables you to avoid white edges after cutting and folding pages with elements adjacent to the edge of the page.

8x3 SIM 8x3 SIM

8x3 SIM Rotated 8x3 SIM Rotated

Step & Repeat Saddle Stitch Perfect Bound Cut & Stack

Note: Applying Bleed Size results in the bleed effect only when a file contains bleed applied in the originating DTP application.

184 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

To specify the required bleed:

From the Bleed Size options, select To Fold in order to extend bleed to the sheet fold lines. Or: Select Custom and type the required bleed size in millimeters.

Marks

Marks are additional images printed on the sheet that help in the finishing process by noting where trimming and folding should occur.

To add crop and/or fold marks:

1. If you would like the lines that indicate where the sheet should be cropped, to be printed on the sheet, select the Add Crop Marks check box. You may also select the Print on both sides check box if you would like the crop marks to be printed on both sides of the page.

Note: You cannot extend the bleed size beyond the sheet fold lines. Bleed does not affect the position of crop. A file incorporates bleed previously applied in a DTP application, applying bleed results in the bleed effect. If bleed has not been incorporated in the file, application of bleed on the CXP3535 Color Server does not create bleed.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 185

2. If you would like the lines that indicate where the sheet should be folded are printed on the sheet, select the Add Fold Marks check box.

Margins

The Margins parameter enables you to adjust the spaces between the outside edges of pages and the edges of the sheet on which they are printed. Margin settings should suit finishing equipment and requirements. Confirm binding parameters with your binder when planning your sheet.

This function uses the following terminology:

The Spine Trim Size is the space between adjacent pages on a printed sheet, which, when folded into a signature / booklet, enables grinding and perfect binding. Spine trim size is used with the Perfect Bound method only. If the Saddle Stitch method is used, this value is set to zero and the pages are printed side by side without any space between them.

Note: Crop marks are placed according to Trim Size parameters. A minimum of 5mm is required for crop marks, and 10mm for fold marks. If your job already includes crop marks incorporated in the DTP application, you do not need to add crop marks here. If you do add crop marks, both sets of crop marks can be printed. If you want to use crop marks incorporated in the DTP application, ensure that enough space is left around your page in the PS file so that the page prints with crop marks.

186 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The Minimum Gutter Size is the inside space between pairs of pages on a sheet. When folded into a signature / booklet, the gutter allows space for trimming.

The Minimum Margin Size is the distance between the outside edges of the sheet and the edges of the pages printed on the sheet. You can set the minimum margin size, but not the exact size, which is calculated by the CXP3535 Color Server in accordance with other imposition parameters.

To set the margins:

In the Margins options, type the required margin sizes.

Creep

When inserting signatures inside one another when binding saddle- stitched jobs, the signatures inserted last (in other words towards the center of the job) are the furthest away from the center of the publication. When the publication is trimmed down to its final size, the inward page sections drift outward (or are even clipped).

Note: For specific sheet templates there may be only one gutter, or no gutter at all. (i.e., in two up, there is no gutter.) In these cases, the Minimum Gutter Size setting is ignored.

Note: Units of measurement (mm or inches) reflect system configuration. They are chosen in the Administration window.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 187

Creep compensates for this problem by moving the pages on inside signatures progressively closer to the fold (in other words the position of the final PostScript trimmed pages remains at a constant distance from the outside edge of the book, when in fact the margins closest to the spine are continually changing).

This function uses the following terminology:

Total Creep In specifies the amount of movement towards the spine applied to the center two pages and their backs (in other words the pages that require the most amount of compensation). An ever-decreasing amount of movement is automatically applied from the center quartet of pages back towards the outside four pages of the job (in other words every quartet of pages is moved by an amount less than the previous quartet). If required, the CXP3535 Color Server can also set Total Creep In automatically based on paper stock weight.

Initial Creep Out is useful for the cases you find that the page images get too close to the spine. This problem can be resolved by giving a value for Initial Creep Out. This will move all the pages of the job further out towards the outside margin (away from the spine) by the specified amount. This movement takes place before the Total Creep In value is applied.

To set the creep:

1. To select the amount of total creep in, type the required amount for Total Creep In. Or: Select Auto so that the CXP3535 Color Server will set the Total Creep In automatically based on paper stock weight.

2. To select the amount of initial creep out, type the required amount for Initial Creep Out.

Note: It is recommended that you use a border around all documents when Creep is used.

Note: The outside two pages and their backs are not moved (the value 0.0 is used).

Note: Units of measurement (mm or inches) are set in the Administration window.

188 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The Services Tab The Services tab enables you to set deletion policies for completed and failed jobs, to perform a preflight check on key components, to set font substitution preferences and to apply APR (Automatic Picture Replacement). In addition, you may set the job flow, the job info, select the required compression, or split a PostScript file into booklets.

Job Deletion

Job Deletion is initially set to Save which means that completed and failed jobs are automatically saved in the Storage Folder unless you select one of the Job Deletion check boxes.

On large VI jobs, which take up a large amount of the CXP3535 Color Server disk space, it is recommended that you use one the Job Deletion options if you do not need to reprint the job.

To set a deletion policy for a job:

1. Suspend the In Process queue and import your job.

2. In the Job Parameters window, Services tab, click the Job Deletion parameter.

Note: When the SpoolStore virtual printer is selected, jobs remain in the Storage Folder.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 189

3. Select Delete after Complete to remove jobs from the CXP3535 Color Server after they have been printed. Or / and: Select Delete on Job Failure to remove failed jobs (while processing or printing) from the CXP3535 Color Server.

4. Resume the In Process queue to initiate job processing and printing.

Substitute Fonts

To define a substitute font policy:

Select No to halt processing if the required font is missing. Or: Select Yes to substitute any missing font with the corresponding font set in the Administration window as the substitution font.

Note: When font substitution is performed, a message appears in the Job History window of the specific file.

For further information on fonts and managing them, see Fonts on page 386.

190 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

APR

APR (Automatic Picture Replacement) is a mechanism that enables you to work with low resolution images (for layout purposes); and automatically replace these images with their associated high resolution images during the RIP.

The CXP3535 Color Server is predefined with an APR path for placing the high resolution files. This path is D:\Shared\High Res.

Specify if you would like to print the job using low resolution files (for proofing purposes) or replace these with the corresponding high resolution files located in the high resolution path (APR path). You may also specify if you would like to use the APR masking (if such was applied) in the PS image, in the high resolution image or use only the masking data common to both the high resolution and the low resolution image files.

To set the APR options:

1. Select Print with High Res to replace low resolution images within your job with high resolution images (located in the specified APR path). Or: Select Print with Low Res to print the job with the existing low resolution images.

2. If you would like to use the masking data contained in the high resolution file (if such data exists), in the Use APR Mask from area, select High Res. Or: Select PS Image (low resolution) to use the masking data contained in

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 191

the low resolution image file. Or: Select Both to use only the common masking data to both high and low resolution image files (i.e., if the images defined by the two sets of masking data overlap, then this overlapping area is RIPped).

3. In the APR Path area, use the default path (set when installing the software) for the high resolution images. Or: Click the Add button to add additional paths for the high resolution images (or to change the order in which the paths are searched). The APR Editor window appears, indicating the default path (and other paths, if such were already defined).

4. Select the Include Subfolder check box to include all the subfolders of all the paths.

5. Click the New Path button and select the required path.

6. Select the arrow buttons to move a selected path up or down to the beginning or the end of the list.

Note: If, for example, the masking data in the low resolution image file defines a completely different part of an image than the masking data in the high resolution file, no masking data is used.

Note: The order in which the paths are listed specifies the order of searching for the high resolution images.

192 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

7. If you would like to delete paths from the search, select a path and click the Delete button.

Job Flow

The Job Flow parameter enables the CXP3535 Color Server operator to specify a job flow for a job that is imported to the CXP3535 Color Server from the network or from the CXP3535 Color Server folders.

To select a job flow:

Select Process & Print for the CXP3535 Color Server to RIP the PDL files, print them, and store them in the Storage Folder (unless the Job Deletion parameter is set to Delete after Complete).

Or: Select Process & Store to RIP the PDL files and move them to the Storage Folder as RTP jobs.

Note: When adding or deleting paths, you can select only one APR path each time.

For further details, see Job Deletion on page 188.

Note: The Spool & Store option (the CXP3535 Color Server places the PDL files directly into the Storage Folder without processing them) is disabled and can be defined only through the PPD parameters of the virtual printer.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 193

Compression

When printing particularly complex jobs, there may be cases where the jobs fail to print. In such cases, the following message may appear in the Alerts window: "Job failed in print. Please try to change paper feed direction or set compression to high level from services tab."

If this message appears, use the compression option.

To set the compression:

Select Normal to deactivate the compression process. Or: Select High to use compression. Also, select High if the above message appears.

Note: When printing with compression, some job quality may be lost.

194 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Preflight

The Preflight parameter enables you to perform a preflight check concerning the status of key job components, before a job is sent for processing. This check results in the job Preflight report.

To run a preflight check of job components:

Select Run preflight check and select the check boxes of the key job components you wish to include in the preflight check.

Preflight Report

The Preflight report is a job-related report, that provides information about the status (missing or found) of key job components prior to processing.

By default, a Preflight report is not issued for each job. To issue this report, you need to run a preflight check for the job using the Preflight job parameter. The Preflight report is especially useful to detect missing job components, since it enables you to view the missing components all at once and consequently save inefficient processing time with constant error / failed messages.

Note: In any case, if a job component is missing, the job will fail before RIPing, an alert message will appear and the information regarding missing components will appear in the Job History window.

Note: If one of the selected elements on the list is missing, the job status at the end of the preflight check is Failed and the job is transferred to the Storage Folder.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 195

If you run a preflight check, and all key components are found, the job is processed / printed according to the job flow you have selected. If the test fails (missing key elements are detected), the job is returned to the Storage Folder with the preflight report available for inspection.

Since the Preflight report lists all key job components (missing and found), you may choose to use this report to view the existing (found) key job components, for example the list of the existing fonts in a job, and their corresponding path/s.

The Preflight report always reflects the last preflight run: if more than one preflight check is run on a job, the latest Preflight report overrides the previous. In any case, when a Preflight report is produced, the date and time of the preflight check are indicated in the Jobs History window.

To view the preflight report:

1. Right-click the job in the Storage Folder, and from the menu select Preflight Report. The Preflight report is displayed (if you have selected the High Res option in the preflight check, the high resolution report is displayed first).

196 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

If there are missing key components in the job, this will be indicated by a missing icon on the High Res, Spot Colors and Fonts buttons.

If you did not select a key component option for the preflight check, a closed eye icon appears on the component button. This icon indicates that information for this category of key components is unavailable.

2. To display all high resolution files, from the Show list select All. Or: To display only the found high resolution files, from the Show list select Found Only. Or: To display only the missing high resolution files, from the Show list select All Missing.

3. Click the Spot Colors button. The Spot Colors report is displayed.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 197

The Spot Colors report displays the missing spot color names (spot colors which were not found in the Spot Color Dictionary) and the found Spot Color names (which were found in the Spot Color Dictionary). The C/M/Y/K columns display the spot color C/M/Y/K equivalences:

If the status is Missing theC/M/Y/K equivalences are according to the original file.

If the status is Found theC/M/Y/K equivalences are according to the Spire Spot Color Dictionary.

4. To display only the found spot colors files, from the Show list select All Found. Or: To display only the missing spot colors files, from the Show list select All Missing.

5. Click the Fonts button. The Fonts report is displayed.

198 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The Fonts report displays the name of the missing fonts (which are not embedded in the file and do not exist in the Spire Font Library), and the found fonts. The Source column indicates whether the font is embedded in the file or was found in the Spire Font Library.

6. To display only the found fonts, from the Show list select Found Only. Or: To display only the missing fonts, from the Show list select Missing Only.

7. To save the Preflight report, click the Save As button and browse to the required location.

8. To print the report, click the Print Report button.

Job Info

Job information entered in the Job Info parameter can be viewed in the Accounting window, in the Job Parameters window and on the Admin page. This information helps in tracking and assigning jobs. The information includes the job title, the sender name, account details, recipient and other job-related comments.

Tip: If more than one preflight check is run on a job, the latest preflight report overrides the previous. If required you may save the report for future usage.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 199

To assign job info:

1. Type a job name in the Job Title box. If a job is selected, the job title is displayed automatically.

2. Type the job sender name in the Sender box. If a job is selected, the senders name is displayed automatically.

3. Type the name of the Job account in the Account box.

4. Type the name of the job recipient in the Recipient box.

5. Type free text (up to 80 characters) to be viewed as a comment in the Job Comments box.

Split to Booklets

The Split to booklets parameter enables you to split a PostScript file (PS or PDF files) into booklets, and simulate the VI job structure. This feature is especially useful if you have a PS job that contains variable information. In this case, you will be able to manage your job more efficiently by setting the imposition per booklet, the stapling options per booklet, or use duplex printing per booklet, which will automatically insert blank pages if the number of pages per booklet is a odd number.

To split a job to booklets:

1. From the Split to booklets options, select Yes.

200 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

2. In the Numbers of pages per booklet box, type the required number of pages per booklet.

The Finishing Tab The Finishing tab enables you to define whether you would like to print an administration page, slip sheets, front and back cover pages. In addition, you may define the finisher options.

Admin Page

You may print an Admin Page with the job. The Admin page contains job- related information such as the job title, page size, number of pages / sets, and the sender name. In addition, PostScript errors will be specified, for example when using a substitute font or low resolution files (APR).

The Admin page is printed in the same order as the job, before each set for face-down printing and after each set for face-up printing.

Note: If the specified number of pages per booklet is not sufficient to produce complete booklets that each contain the same specified number (there is a remainder of pages), then the last pages will form the last booklet and will consequently contain less pages than specified.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 201

To print an administration page:

1. From the Admin page options, select the Print Admin page check box.

2. To print the admin page on the same paper stock as the job:

a. From the Use Paper Stock list, select the Same as job (default).

b. From the Tray list, select the required tray. Or: Use the default tray which was selected for the job.

3. To print the admin page on a different paper stock than the job:

a. From the Use Paper Stock list, select Other. The Admin page options displays as follows.

b. From the Paper Size list, select the required paper size.

c. From the Media Type list, select the required media type.

d. From the Tray list, select the required tray.

Note: The default values are those of the job.

202 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

4. To print the admin page on a custom paper size:

a. From the Paper Size list select Custom. The Admin page options displays as follows.

b. Type the required height in the H box and width in the W box.

c. Select the required orientations: SEF or LEF.

Note: The orientation of the Admin page should be as the rest of the job.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 203

Slip Sheet

You may print Slip Sheets with the job and set the required paper type for the slip sheet to be printed on. If the job is collated, the slip sheets will be printed between sets. If the job is uncollated, the slip sheets will be printed between groups.

To print slip sheets:

1. From the Slip sheet options, select the Print Slip-Sheet check box.

2. If you would like to print a slip sheet between each set, use the default Every 1 set/s. Or: In the set/s box, type the required number.

3. To print the slip sheet on the same paper stock as the job:

a. From the Use Paper Stock list, select the Same as job (default).

b. From the Tray list, select the required tray. Or: Use the default tray which was selected for the job.

Note: Slip-sheets and blank pages in a transparency job (interleaves) are not counted in the number of pages reported on the Admin page.

204 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

4. To print the slip sheet on a different paper stock than the job:

a. From the Use Paper Stock list, select Other. The Slip Sheet options displays as follows:

b. From the Paper Size list, select the required paper size.

c. From the Media Type list, select the required media type.

d. From the Tray list, select the required tray.

Note: The default values are those of the job.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 205

5. To print the slip sheet on a custom paper size:

a. From the Paper Size list select Custom. The Slip Sheet options displays as follows.

b. Type the required height in the H box, and the required width in the W box.

c. Select the required orientations: SEF or LEF.

Note: The orientation of the slip sheet should be as the rest of the job.

206 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Front Cover

You may print a Front cover with the job and set the required paper stock for the front cover to be printed on.

You may also print a blank front cover, or specify that the first page or first two pages of the job, will be printed as the front cover if duplexed.

To print a front cover:

1. From the Front cover options, select the Print Front Cover check box.

2. From the Cover Printing list select the required option:

Select None to print a blank front cover.

Select Print on one side to print the first page of the job as a front cover (a blank page will be added automatically for the front cover back side).

Select Print on both sides to print the first two pages of the job as a front cover.

3. To print the front cover on the same paper stock as the job:

a. From the Use Paper Stock list, select the Same as job (default).

b. From the Tray list, select the required tray. Or: Use the default tray which was selected for the job.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 207

4. To print the front cover on a different paper stock than the job:

a. From the Use Paper Stock list, select Other. The Front cover options displays as follows.

b. From the Paper Size list, select the required paper size.

c. From the Media Type list, select the required media type.

d. From the Tray list, select the required tray.

Note: The default values are those of the job.

208 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

5. To print the front cover on a custom paper size:

a. From the Paper Size list select Custom. The Front cover options displays as follows.

b. Type the required height in the H box, and the required width in the W box.

c. Select the required orientations: SEF or LEF.

Note: The orientation of the front cover should be as the rest of the job.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 209

Back Cover

You may print a Back cover with the job and set the required paper stock for the back cover to be printed on. You may print a blank back cover, or specify that the last page or last two pages of the job, will be printed as the back cover if duplexed.

To print a back cover:

1. From the Back cover options, select the Print Back Cover check box.

2. From the Cover Printing list select the required option:

Select None to print a blank back cover.

Select Print on one side to print the last page of the job as a back cover (a blank page will be added automatically for the back cover front side).

Select Print on both sides to print the last two pages of the job as a back cover.

3. To print the back cover on the same paper stock as the job:

a. From the Use Paper Stock list, select the Same as job (default).

b. From the Tray list, select the required tray. Or: Use the default tray which was selected for the job.

210 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

4. To print the back cover on a different paper stock than the job:

a. From the Use Paper Stock list, select Other. The Back cover options displays as follows.

b. From the Paper Size list, select the required paper size.

c. From the Media Type list, select the required media type.

d. From the Tray list, select the required tray.

Note: The default values are those of the job.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 211

5. To print the back cover on a custom paper size:

a. From the Paper Size list select Custom. The Back cover options displays as follows.

b. Type the required height in the H box, and the required width in the W box.

c. Select the required orientations: SEF or LEF.

Note: The orientation of the back cover should be as the rest of the job.

212 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Finisher

To select a finishing option:

1. From the Module list, select the printed outputs destination:

Center Tray - to print to the center tray.

Finisher Tray - to print to a the stacker or stapler.

Note: The finisher module must be connected to the CXP3535 Color Server.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 213

2. If you selected Finisher Tray,the Finisher options are displayed as follows.

3. From the Module list, select the required finisher.

4. If you selected Stacker (default) the job will be printed to the finisher stack tray.

5. If you select Stapler, the Finisher options are displayed as follows.

6. Select the required stapling option.

Note: For PostScript files, available stapling methods depend on page orientation and size. For PDF files, stapling methods depend on page size.

214 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

The Exception Tab

In the Exception tab, you may set different paper stocks for special exceptions within a job and also add inserts (interleaves) if required.

Settings exceptions for imposed jobs

You may set exceptions / inserts also for imposed jobs.

If the selected imposition method is Saddle Stitch or Perfect Bound, the exceptions are handled in the imposed sheet level (and not on a page level).

You cannot set exceptions or inserts if the selected imposition method is Step & Repeat and its sub-option Cut & Stack.

Tip: You may also select different paper size than the job, and consequently print on tabs. For further details, see Printing on tabs on page 218.

Notes:

1. For the Step & Repeat imposition method, exceptions are handled on a page level (same as for non-imposed jobs).

2. An imposed sheet contains the multiple images that are all printed on the same physical sheet.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 215

If the job is an imposed job, the Exception Properties displays as follows:

This function uses the following terminology:

Exceptions: special pages within the job for which you may want to assign different media stock in the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer. For example, you may choose to assign a different paper stock for each chapter within a book. This process includes defining the required print range and assigning the required paper stock.

Inserts: (used mainly for interleaves) blank pages of a selected media, that are assigned to the job after a specified number of pages. This process includes defining the number of inserted pages, their location in the printed job and assigning the required paper stock.

Managing Exceptions

To add exceptions to a job:

1. In the Exceptions area click the Add Exception icon. A blue line appears in the Exceptions area.

2. In the From page and To page boxes, type the required page range for the exception. For imposed jobs, type the required values in the From imposed sheet box.

3. From the Paper Size list, select the required paper size.

4. From the Media Type list, select the required media type.

For further information see The Paper Stock Tab on page 140.

216 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

5. From the Tray list, select the required tray. Or: Select Auto for any tray with the available paper stock to be selected.

6. If it any time you would like to reset the paper stock properties, click the Discard button.

7. Click the Add button. The exception is added to the Exceptions area.

To edit exceptions:

1. In the Exceptions area, select the exception you would like to edit. The Exception tab displays the exception properties.

2. Edit the exception properties as required; you may change the exception range and / or the paper stock properties.

3. Click the Apply button. The Exception properties are updated in the Exception area.

To remove exceptions:

1. Under Exceptions select the required exception.

2. Click the Remove Exceptions icon. The exception is removed from the list.

Note: The default values are those specified for the job.

Note: After the Add button is clicked, it is replaced by the Apply button which is used for editing exceptions. See the following procedure.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 217

Managing Inserts:

To add inserts:

1. Under Inserts Properties, click the Add Insert icon. A blue line appears in the Inserts Properties area and the tab displays as follows.

2. In the After page box, type the page number that will precede the insert, and in the Quantity box, specify the required number of inserts. For imposed jobs, type the required values in the After imposed sheet box.

3. From the Paper Size list, select the required paper size.

4. From the Media Type list, select the required media type.

5. From the Tray list, select the required tray. Or: Select Auto for any tray with the available paper stock to be selected.

6. If at any time you would like to reset the paper stock properties click the Discard button.

Note: The default values are those specified for the job.

218 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

7. Click the Add button. The insert is added to the Insert Properties area.

To edit inserts:

1. From the Inserts Properties area, select the insert you would like to edit. The Exception tab displays the insert properties.

2. Edit the insert properties as required; you may change:

The page / sheet number that precedes the insert, in the After page box.

The insert Quantity.

The insert paper stock properties.

3. Click the Apply button. The insert properties are updated in the Inserts Properties area.

To remove inserts:

1. Under Inserts Properties select the required insert.

2. Click the Remove Insert icon. The insert is removed from the list.

Printing on tabs

Printed tabs are tabs that contain printed information, for example a chapter name.

In order to include printed tabs in a job, you need to plan ahead while preparing the job in the DTP application: you should specify a different page size for the tab pages.

If your DTP application does not enable you to specify different pages sizes within a job, you may also set margins within the job pages, and locate the tab content outside the margins, and the body content within the margins.

In any case, when the file is imported to the CXP3535 Color Server, you should select one paper size for the job, and then select a different paper size for the tabs using the Exceptions tab.

Note: After the Add button is clicked, it is replaced by the Apply button which is used for editing exceptions. See the following procedure.

Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server 219

Following are two procedures for printing tabs. The first procedure should be followed if your DTP application supports multiple page sizes within a job (for example Microsoft Word). The second procedure should be followed if your DTP application does not support multiple page sizes within a job.

To print tabs if your DTP application supports multiple paper sizes in a job:

1. In the DTP application:

a. Create a document and set the page size for the document body pages, for example 8.5x11.

b. Set the page size of the tabs pages, for example 9x12.

2. Print the file to the CXP3535 Color Server using the Spool & Store workflow.

3. Double-click the job in the Storage Folder. The Job Parameters window appears.

4. In the Paper Stock tab select the required paper size. According to the above example, a paper size of 8.5x11 should be selected.

5. In the Exceptions tab:

a. Select the required tab page size. According to the above example, a paper size of 9x12 should be selected.

b. Specify the pages number that should be printed as tabs.

To print tabs if your DTP application does not support multiple paper sizes in a job:

1. In the DTP application:

a. Create a document and define the page size (for all the job) as required for the tabs. For example 9x12.

b. Specify the margins for the document boundaries, for example 8.5x11.

c. Locate the content that should be printed on the tab, outside the margins.

d. Locate the body content inside the margins.

2. Print the file to the CXP3535 Color Server using the Spool & Store workflow.

220 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

3. Double-click the job in the Storage Folder. The Job Parameters window appears.

4. In the Paper Stock tab select the required paper size. According to the above example, a paper size of 8.5x11 should be selected.

5. In the Exceptions tab:

a. Select the required paper size. According to the above example, a paper size of 9x12 should be selected.

b. Specify the page numbers that should be printed as tabs.

Adjusting Job Parameters Post-RIP 221

Adjusting Job Parameters Post-RIP Job Parameters can also be adjusted for jobs that have already been processed and which are being held in the Storage Folder. Re-RIP indication appears in the job ticket when you modify specific parameters that require the re-processing of the job.

Changes to the following job parameters require re-RIPing of the job:

Print Settings tab

Changes to the Image Scale parameter.

Paper Stock tab

In the Size parameter, changing the orientation from LEF to SEF and Vice versa or other modifications that require changing the orientations due to print engine limitations.

Print Quality tab

All Print Quality options require re-RIPing.

Color tab

Changes to the Color Mode parameter.

Changes to the CMYK Workflow parameter.

Changes to the Ink Saving (GCR) parameter.

Changes to the RGB Workflow parameter.

Changes to the CMYK Workflow parameter.

Changes to the Destination profile parameter.

Imposition tab

Changes to the Size parameter when changing the orientation of the Trim size from Landscape to Portrait.

Changes to the Template parameter when changing from non-rotated template to rotated.

Note: Jobs edited using Job Preview & Editor cannot be re-RIPped. Once a job has been saved in the Job Preview & Editor tool, it is a new RTP file without an associated PDL file. Therefore, parameters requiring re-RIPing cannot be applied.

222 Chapter 4 Working on the CXP3535 Color Server

Services tab

In APR, when High Res is changed to Low Res (and vise-versa) and when settings are changed in the APR Path box.

Changes to the Compression parameter.

Changes to the Preflight parameter.

Changes to the Substitute Fonts parameter.

Changes to the Split to Booklets parameter.

Working from the Client Workstation

Introduction....................................................................................224

Printing from Client Workstations ...................................................224

Setting PPD Parameters from Client Workstations ...........................232

Spire Web Center............................................................................240

224 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

Introduction This chapter explains the different methods for printing from client workstations and provides detailed explanations about using hot folders from PC and Macintosh client workstations.

This chapter also explains how to set job parameters from the client workstation using the PPD parameters and details the available job parameters.

A section about the Spire Web Center is also available in this chapter. This section explains how to use this web tool to monitor your jobs in the CXP3535 Color Server queues, from your client workstation.

Printing from Client Workstations In order to print a job from a client workstation you may select one of the following methods:

Print the job on one of the CXP3535 Color Server network (virtual) printers, for example ProcessPrint. The job will then be spooled and processed or printed (according to the selected job flow of the virtual printer). Using this method, you may print from any application (for example, Microsoft Word) using any file format, from any client workstation (PC, Macintosh and UNIX).

Drag the job to a required hot folder. The job will then be spooled and processed / printed (according to the selected job flow of the corresponding virtual printer).

Using this method, you may print most PDL (Page Description Language) files, for example, PostScript, PDF, EPS, VPS, VIPP are supported for print on the CXP3535 Color Server.

For detailed explanations on how to print from a PC or from a Macintosh client workstation, see Printing from a PC on page 55 or Printing from a Macintosh on page 63.

For further information on hot folders, see Using Hot Folders on page 225.

Note: PDL jobs that are spooled to the CXP3535 Color Server, must have the appropriate name extensions, for example: *.ps or *.pdf.

Printing from Client Workstations 225

Using Hot Folders For every published CXP3535 Color Server network printer that is defined on a client workstation, a corresponding hot folder is automatically created in the CXP3535 Color Server D:\Hot Folders folder.

Each hot folder carries the virtual printer's name (HF_printers name). See the following graphic.

Use the hot folder to submit PDL jobs to the CXP3535 Color Server, by connecting from a client workstation to the CXP3535 Color Server over the network. When connection is established, drag and drop your jobs onto the required hot folder (according to the selected workflow).

Jobs that reside in the hot folder will automatically be submitted to the CXP3535 Color Server through the corresponding virtual printer. Consequently, all of the virtual printer job parameters, inclusive of the workflow, will be applied to the job.

Tip: You may also drag the hot folder icon to your desktop to create a short cut to the folder for future usage.

226 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

As soon as the job has been spooled to the CXP3535 Color Server, it disappears from the hot folder and enters the CXP3535 Color Server In Process queue or Storage Folder, according to the selected workflow.

Hot Folder File Formats Hot folders may contain all PDL files formats that are supported by the CXP3535 Color Server: PS, PDF, EPS, PRN, VPS, VIPP, PPML, TIF, JPG and GAP.

Files with unsupported formats that are moved to a hot folder, will not be imported to the CXP3535 Color Server and will remain in the hot folder.

Hot Folders and Brisque / Prinergy Jobs (GAP Formats) While using hot folders to print GAP format jobs, the process is automated and the job is converted to a PDF that is displayed in the CXP3535 Color Server queues. The PDF files can then be programmed and printed as any other PDF file.

Printing Using Hot Folders You may process and print files from any client workstation, using hot folders. Following are detailed explanations for printing using hot folders from a PC, from Macintosh O/S 9 and from Macintosh O/S X.

To print a job through a hot folder from a PC:

1. On your Windows desktop, double-click the Network Neighborhood icon.

2. Browse to the location of your CXP3535 Color Server.

3. Double-click the CXP3535 Color Server.

Note: If files are sent for printing through a hot folder while the CXP3535 Color Server application is down, whenever the application restarts, the files that reside in hot folders will immediately be imported to the system.

For further information on supported GAP formats see Printing PrePress Files - Graphic Art Port (GAP) on page 315.

Printing from Client Workstations 227

A list of all the shared folders and hot folders appears.

4. Double-click the required hot folder, for example HF_ProcessPrint.

5. You may now drag and drop the required files to the hot folder. All the files are processed and printed automatically to the printer, according to the hot folder workflow.

Tip: You may also drag the hot folder icon to your desktop to create a short cut to the folder for future usage.

228 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

To print a job through a hot folder from Macintosh OS 9:

1. Click the Apple menu and then select Chooser. The Chooser window appears.

2. Browse the network to the CXP3535 Color Server, and click OK. The Login window appears.

Printing from Client Workstations 229

3. Select Guest and click the Connect button.

4. From the list, select the required hot folder, for example HF_ProcessPrint, and click OK. The hot foldericon appears on your desktop.

5. You may now drag and drop the required files to the hot folder icon. All the files are processed and printed automatically to the printer, according to the hot folder workflow.

To print a job through a hot folder from a Macintosh OS X:

1. From the Finder menu bar select Go>Connect to Server.

230 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

The Connect to Server window appears.

2. Browse the network to your CXP3535 Color Server and click the Connect button.

Printing from Client Workstations 231

The Login window appears.

3. Select Guest and click the Connect button.

4. From the list, select the required hot folder, for example HF_ProcessPrint, and click OK. The hot foldericon appears on your desktop.

5. You may now drag and drop the required files to the hot folder icon. All the files are processed and printed automatically to the printer, according to the hot folder workflow.

232 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

Setting PPD Parameters from Client Workstations Setting job parameters from a client workstation can be done through the CXP3535 Color Server PPD or by defining a virtual printer with predefined PPD settings.

By using the CXP3535 Color Server PPD:

Through the Print window of your application, select print settings specific to printing to the CXP3535 Color Server.

By defining a virtual printer:

Set job parameters when creating or editing a Virtual Printer. These settings become the Printer's Default options.

PPD Parameters The following table lists the PPD (PostScript Printer Description) parameters and the printing options that can be selected from the Print window of an application.

Note: In the PPD file, the Printer Default option is presented for all PPD parameters. Printer's Default corresponds to the settings of the currently- selected virtual printer. When setting or adjusting job parameters, the last-modified or applied parameter settings are the settings that are applied to the job. However, the print settings defined in the job file override the settings of the virtual printer. Grayscale images created in RGB applications (such as PowerPoint) should be specified as Monochrome or submitted to the system with BW Printing selected in the PPD. This selection ensures that grayscale images are counted as black and white instead of colorin both the CXP3535 Color Server and in the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer billing meters.

Setting PPD Parameters from Client Workstations 233

PPD Parameter Printing Options

Media Type Use Printers Settings uses the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer default media type.

You may also select the required media type from the list.

Print Method Simplex prints single-sided pages (Printer Default).

In Duplex Head to Toe, the image on the reverse side of sheet is rotated 180 degrees. It used for calendar-style hard copies and presentation-style copies (usually used with Landscape jobs).

In Duplex Head to Head, the head of the image appears at the top of the page on both sides of the sheet. It is used for normal book-style hard copies (usually used with Portrait jobs).

Manual Duplex processes and prints the job first side pages first. Then, these pages should be placed facing down in the bypass tray to print the second side.

Face Down Face Down delivers the pages face-down on the printer (when printing confidential documents).

Face Up delivers the pages facing up on the printer.

Print Order 1 to N starts printing from the first page.

N to 1 starts printing from the last page.

Collation Yes prints a complete copy of the job before the first page of the next copy is printed.

No prints all the copies of each page before all the copies of the next page are printed.

Color Mode Color prints all pages using all CMYK toners.

With Color, Print grays using black toner all grayscale RGB images are printed using black toner only. If you would like grayscale CMYK elements to be printed using black toner only, you need to select Perceptual as the rendering intent.

Grayscale prints all pages using black (K) toner only.

234 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

Text and Line Quality

High provides superior text quality. This setting applies the Creo proprietary algorithm that enhances the quality of diagonal lines, borders, blends, and small text. The Creo anti-aliasing causes blends to appear smooth with no banding and diagonal lines to appear crisp without jagged edges (do not use this option with VI jobs).

Normal provides standard text quality.

Image Quality High provides superior image quality. This setting applies the Creo proprietary smooth scale algorithm, which improves the quality of images containing several resolutions (such as images taken from the Internet).

Normal provides standard image quality and increased RIPing speed.

Trapping Yes applies the Creo FAF (Full Auto Frame) algorithm to the job. Trapping solves misregistration between color separations in offset and digital printing. This occurs regardless of the printer device accuracy. This problem results in white lines around objects on top of a background (in a knock-out procedure) and also between adjacent colors. The FAF solution is to extract the element or background to create an overlap between them. Do not use this option with VI jobs.

No does not begin image trapping while RIPing (this does not affect trapping incorporated by the authoring application). If trapping was applied in the authoring application, select No.

Image Noise No (default) applies no image noise to your job.

Noise 2-10 apply image noise. The higher the level, the smoother the vignettes appear.

PPD Parameter Printing Options

Setting PPD Parameters from Client Workstations 235

Black Overprint Yes provides better printing quality (as in FAF) and a richer, deeper black with the underlying CMY values equal to the those of the printed background. As a result, misregistrations are not visible. Black Overprint ensures that 100% black text prints cleanly within a tint or picture area. Occasionally white lines may appear around black text and the text may appear less dense than required as a result of misregistration between color separations. With Black Overprint, the Pure Black Text / Graphics option is automatically activated and there are no knock-outs under the black text. However, a knock-out occurs when you print only the topmost color. This results in less color density and can cause misregistration if separations are not perfectly aligned.

No leaves the job as is.

PS Overprint PS (PostScript) Overprint offers the option to use the overprint, which exists in the PS file. It also determines whether the DTP application PS Overprint settings are honored in the RIP. CXP3535 Color Server settings override PS Overprint commands from DTP applications. For example, if PS Overprint was set to Yes in a DTP application, selecting PS Overprint No in the CXP3535 Color Server results in no overprinting. The CXP3535 Color Server can not create PS Overprint that is not pre-defined in the file. Selecting PS Overprint Yes for a file that has not had overprinting defined in a DTP application does not result in overprinting.

Yes (default) instructs the RIP to use the overprint information that exists in the input PostScript file. Also, if PS Overprint is applied in a DTP applications, it is implemented by the CXP3535 Color Server. Background colors are not knocked out. For example, in the case of a yellow triangle overlapping a cyan circle, selecting Yes results in the overlapping area turning green. This is not seen on the screen, only in print.

No ignores the overprint information that exists in the input PostScript file. Background colors are knocked out and only the top most color parts are seen on the screen in your DTP application. For example, in the case of a yellow triangle overlapping a cyan circle, selecting No results in the cyan background being knocked out, so only the yellow is printed.

PPD Parameter Printing Options

236 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

Brightness Brightness settings can be applied to RTP jobs without reprocessing (re- RIPing the file).

Normal keeps the current job setting and does not apply extra brightness.

To apply brightness, select one of the range options: Light (5%), Lighter (10%), Lightest (15%), Dark (5%), Darker (10%), Darkest (15%).

Contrast Contrast settings can be applied to RTP jobs without re-processing (re- RIPing the file).

Normal keeps the current job setting and does not apply extra contrast.

To apply contrast, select Less Contrast or More Contrast.

RGB Workflow This option changes gamma values, thus producing more color depth for RGB images.

To use CSA in the image, select Use Source CSA.

To replace CSA with RGB, select: Use CSXRGB 1.8, Use CSXRGB2.1 Use sRGB, Use AdobeRGB or Use CSXRGB 2.4.

Rendering Intent for RGB

Rendering Intent defines how colors are compressed from Lab values to printer color space. Saturated (presentation) and Perceptual (photographic) are the most effective RI methods for RGB images.)

Relative Colorimetric provides an accurate general-purpose gamut mapping for all applications. The lowest density is mapped to white.

Absolute Colorimetric preserves the substrate tint.

Saturated (presentation) produces saturated colors that are suitable for office environment applications (for example text documents and presentations).

Perceptual (photographic) yields the most effective results on continuous tone and images.

CMYK Workflow Select whether to Use Source CSA or Use Original CMYK Colors for your CMYK image.

PPD Parameter Printing Options

Setting PPD Parameters from Client Workstations 237

CMYK Emulation Select a CMYK emulation: Printers Default (None), Fogra Gloss, Fogra Matt, Fogra Uncoated, Euroscale, Gravure, Offset, Match Print, iGen3, DC2060/6060, DocuColor40 or SWOP.

Printers Default (None), applies Ink Saving (GCR) without emulation. In all cases, emulation applied in the original DTP application overrides the CXP3535 Color Server settings.

Destination Profile Select the required color gamut profile of the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer. Currently the only available color profile is SpireDC3535.

Emulate Source Paper Tint

Yes to emulate also the original paper tint.

No (default).

Rendering Intent for CMYK

Rendering Intent defines how colors are compressed from Lab values to printer color space. Relative Colorimetric and Absolute Colorimetric are the most effective RI methods for CMYK images.)

Relative Colorimetric provides an accurate general-purpose gamut mapping for all applications. The lowest density is mapped to white.

Perceptual (photographic) yields the most effective results on continuous tone and images.

Saturated (presentation) produces saturated colors that are suitable for office environment applications (for example text documents and presentations).

Absolute Colorimetric preserves the substrate tint.

Ink Saving (GCR) No does not use GCR and uses default maximum toner settings.

Use Low, Medium, or High to set the amount of CMY toners to be replaced by the black toner. High provides low ink coverage while saving on toner (this prevents the occasional peeling of ink and the curling effect that may occur when printing transparencies).

Calibration Normal prints using the normal LUT (Look-Up table, which is the calibration table name).

Saturated prints using the saturated LUT.

None prints without calibration, thus there is no balance between colors and gives no color calibration data.

PPD Parameter Printing Options

238 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

Screening Method Line 200 applies line type screen of 200 lpi.

Job Deletion On large VI jobs, which take up a large amount of the CXP3535 Color Servers disk space, it is recommended (if you do not need to reprint the job) that you use the this option. Completed and failed jobs are automatically saved in the Storage Folder unless you select one of the Job Deletion options.

Always removes all jobs after they are printed.

Never does not delete any job after printing it.

Successful Only continuously deletes pages once they have been successfully printed and thus sustains enough free disk space for the duration of the print run. Each successfully printed page of the job is immediately deleted while the rest of the job remains in the queue to print.

Failed only removes failed jobs (while processing or printing) from the CXP3535 Color Server.

APR Print with High Res prints using high-resolution files.

Print with Low Res prints using low-resolution files.

Job Flow Process Print RIPs the PDL files and prints them, then moves the files to the Storage Folder or deletes them in accordance with the deletion policy.

Process Store RIPs the PDL files and moves them to the Storage Folder as RTP jobs.

Spool Store copies the PDL files directly to the Storage Folder.

Admin Page The Admin page includes general information about the job, including paper stockparameters (Admin page can also apply to non-successfully completed jobs). The Admin page is printed in the same order as the job, before each set for face-down printing and after each set for face-up printing.

No (default) does not print an admin page with the job.

Yes printsan admin page.

Slip Sheet Yes inserts a sheet offset from the job stock between jobs or copies of a job or at the end of uncollated stacks of pages.

No does not insert any slip-sheets.

PPD Parameter Printing Options

Setting PPD Parameters from Client Workstations 239

Split to Booklets Select the required number 1-10 of pages per booklet.

Printers Default (No) does not split the job to booklets.

Transparency Interleave

Select Off to not add an interleave after the transparency.

Select On for an interleave to be added after the transparency.

Finisher Module Center Tray prints the job to the center tray.

Finisher Tray - Stacker prints the job to the stacker tray.

Finisher Tray - Stapler prints the job to the stapler tray.

Staple Options Portrait - Single Top Left a single staple in the top left corner.

Portrait - Single Top Right a single staple in the top right corner.

Portrait - Dual Right two staples along the right side.

Portrait - Dual Left two staples along the left side.

Portrait - Dual Top two staples along the top.

Landscape - Single Top Left a single staple in the top left corner.

Landscape - Single Top Right a single staple in the top right corner.

Landscape - Dual Right two staples along the right side.

Landscape - Dual Left two staples along the left side.

Landscape - Dual Top two staples along the top.

Rotate 180 Yes (only relevant for the Finisher Module>Stapler option), modifies the stapling position by 180 degrees. For example, instead of stapling on the upper left-hand corner, you can staple on the lower right-hand corner.

No ignores this method.

PPD Parameter Printing Options

240 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

Spire Web Center The Spire Web Center is an internet site that provides online Spire information and can be accessed from client workstations.

The Spire web center enables you to:

View the status of jobs in the Spire queues, the Alerts window in its current state, and the printer system information.

Download remote client tools, utility applications, color profiles, and print drivers.

View Spire related documentation, such as release notes, Spire guides, frequently asked questions and answers, and other troubleshooting information.

Find links to related vendors or products.

To connect to the web center from a client workstation:

1. On your desktop, click the Internet Explorer icon.

2. When the Internet Explorer starts, in the address field type: http:// (for example, if the Spire station name is FALCON_E, type http:\\FALCON_E).

Important: In order to be able to connect to the Spire Web Center from a client workstation, you must first enable the web connect service on the CXP3535 Color Server. This service is enabled through the Administration window, under Preferences>Remote Tools Setup.

For further information, see Remote Tools Setup on page 426.

Important: If you would like to connect to the CXP3535 Color Server from a Macintosh client workstation, contact your system administrator to add the CXP3535 Color Server name to the DNS. This is required since Windows name resolution protocols are not supported in Macintosh.

Spire Web Center 241

The CXP3535 Color Server Web Center is displayed.

The Web Viewer The Web Viewer page enables you to view the printer configuration and system information, to view the jobs that currently reside in the CXP3535 Color Server queues and Storage Folder, and to view the alerts that currently appear in the Alerts window. This information is significant when printing from client workstations since it enables you to monitor your jobs in the queues and act upon the viewed information.

242 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

The Queues Tab In the Queues tab you may view the jobs currently running in the CXP3535 Color Server In Print and In Process queues.

Spire Web Center 243

The Storage Tab In the Storage tab you may view the CXP3535 Color Server Storage Folder and the jobs that reside in this folder.

244 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

The Alerts Tab In the Alerts tab you may view the CXP3535 Color Server Alerts window messages. If for example a job you sent for printing from your client workstation has failed, you may view the message in the Alerts window, edit the job parameters (PPD) and resend it for processing and printing on the CXP3535 Color Server.

Spire Web Center 245

The Printer Tab In the Printer tab you may view the CXP3535 Color Server system information.

246 Chapter 5 Working from the Client Workstation

Downloads The Downloads page enables you to access the CXP3535 Color Server Utilities folder and download available tools and files for PC and Macintosh client workstations, such as the Spire PPD. To download the utilities, right-click the required item and from the menu select Save Target As.

Spire Web Center 247

Links The Links page enables you to link to related vendors or products.

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Workflows & Tools

Introduction....................................................................................250

High-Resolution (APR) Workflow.....................................................250

VI (Variable Information) Workflow .................................................257

Imposition Workflow.......................................................................266

Color Workflow ..............................................................................268

PDF Workflow.................................................................................311

Printing PrePress Files - Graphic Art Port (GAP) ................................315

Scan Back Workflow .......................................................................317

250 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Introduction This chapter describes the CXP3535 Color Server Printing Workflows:

High Resolution (APR and OPI)

VI (Variable Information)

Imposition

Color

Job Batching

PDF

In addition, information is provided on CXP3535 Color Server utilities: the Calibration tool, the Gradation tool, the Spot Color Editor and the GAP (Graphic Art Port).

High-Resolution (APR) Workflow Working with high-resolution files during the design and page layout process can be a long and inefficient process. Processing and manipulating of large files and graphics can be very time consuming. To speed up production, it is common to work with low-resolution files until the RIPing stage.

The CXP3535 Color Server provides APR (Automatic Picture Replacement) and supports OPI (Open Prepress Interface) image replacement workflows for replacing low-resolution files with high- resolution files during the RIP. APR and OPI workflows are accessed through the Job Parameters window Services tab.

For further details, see APR on page 190.

High-Resolution (APR) Workflow 251

Use APR and OPI to:

Minimize production time with faster image processing and working in DTP applications.

Reduce the time to create PostScript files and to print.

Decrease network traffic.

APR (Automatic Picture Replacement) APR is a Creo-developed image replacement method for PostScript files. APR is a standardized set of file instructions that specify how an external high-resolution image is placed in a PostScript file as it goes to RIP. The instructions specify the type, size, position, rotation, cropping and location of the high-resolution images themselves.

When you send your PostScript file to be processed, the CXP3535 Color Server checks it for APR instructions. It then searches for the external high-resolution file, performs the specified image replacement and RIPs the PostScript file.

High-Resolution Image File, 5.23 MB Low-Resolution Image File, 306 KB

252 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

OPI (Open Prepress Interface) Like APR, OPI is a standardized set of file instructions that specify how an external high-resolution image is placed in a PostScript file as it goes to RIP. The instructions specify the type, size, position, rotation, cropping and location of the high-resolution images themselves.

When you send your PostScript file to be processed, the CXP3535 Color Server checks it for OPI instructions. It then searches for the external high- resolution file, performs the specified image replacement and RIPs the PostScript file.

Many OPI systems use remote storage of high-resolution files. The CXP3535 Color Server supports the storage and replacement of high- resolution OPI files internally. However, PDL files from some DTP applications (such as Quark Express) may contain these instructions (comments) by default, although the high resolution files are unavailable and have been embedded in the job. In this case, the job will not be processed and an error message will appear. Therefore, the CXP3535 Color Server OPI image replacement is disabled by default, in order to ensure continuous printing.

The OPI options are specified in the Administration window under Preferences.

APR and OPI File Formats APR and OPI are functionally identical on the CXP3535 Color Server. APR low-resolution files have a *.eextension, while OPI low-resolution files have a *.layextension. The APR and OPI workflows support Creo Continuous Tone, EPSF and TIFF high-resolution file formats.

You can use either the APR or OPI workflow, depending on your high- resolution file type.

Setting the High-Resolution File Path If your high-resolution files are not located in the CXP3535 Color Server default folder, you must specify the APR path(s) in the Job Parameter window Services tab before printing.

Note: For further information see OPI on page 422 for details.

High-Resolution (APR) Workflow 253

Paths other than the default path are defined on a per-job basis, or set in the virtual printer. The order in which the paths are listed determines the order in which the CXP3535 Color Server searches for the high-resolution files.

You may specify paths on local hard drives, CD-ROM drives, and the floppy drive connected to the CXP3535 Color Server. Or you can specify paths on remote clients / file servers.

To set the high-resolution path:

1. Import or download your job to the Storage Folder in the CXP3535 Color Server workspace.

2. Double-click on the job in the CXP3535 Color Server workspace. The Job Parameters window appears.

3. Adjust the job parameters.

4. In the Services tab, click APR.

5. In APR Path area, click the Add button. The APR Editor window appears, indicating the default path.

6. Select the default path or add additional paths to define the location of your high-resolution images.

For further details, see APR on page 190.

254 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

7. You can perform the following functions in the APR Editor:

Select Include Subfolder to include all the sub-folders of all the specified paths.

Click New Path and locate a required path.

Change the order of paths to change the order in which they are searched. Click the arrow buttons to move a path up, down, to the beginning of the search, or to the end of the list.

Select one or several paths and click Delete to remove the path(s) from the search.

8. Set other high-resolution job parameters as required.

Preparing to Print Using APR or OPI

To prepare to print using APR or OPI:

1. Create low-resolution files from high-resolution files.

2. Export each image file as a low-resolution *.e file (in other words a file called duck is exported as duck.e). OPI images can be created in other applications or can be provided by a print service bureau. Ensure that you have created or obtained the required image files.

3. Design the document in a DTP application using low-resolution files.

Note: PS Image (APR low-resolution) files can be created in Adobe Photoshop using the PS Image Exporter Plug-In. The PS Image Exporter Plug-In can be installed from the CXP3535 Color Server Documentation and Utilities CD-ROM. Or download it from the Creo website at www.creo.com.

Note: A PS Image (*.e) file is a low-resolution preview of the original high resolution file. It contains preview information saved at 72dpi in black and white or color. Also, it contains pointers to the location of the high- resolution Image. APR low-resolution files have a *.eextension. OPI low-resolution files have a *.lay extension.

High-Resolution (APR) Workflow 255

4. Perform detailed graphic work on the original high-resolution file. The low-resolution file is used for positioning, rotating, scaling and cropping only.

5. Place the high-resolution files in a defined path on the CXP3535 Color Server. This is where the CXP3535 Color Server looks for them when it RIPs your jobs. Define the high-resolution path through the Job Parameters window for each job.

Printing with APR or OPI If your high-resolution files are located in the CXP3535 Color Server default folder (D:\Shared\HighRes), you can print APR or OPI jobs without adjusting APR settings.

Perform the following steps:

1. Print, download or import the job from the client workstation to the CXP3535 Color Server Storage Folder. The job is processed according to the settings of the selected virtual printer using APR or OPI high-resolution files.

2. Double-click on the job in the CXP3535 Color Server workspace.

3. Select the Print Quality tab in the Job Parameters window.

4. Adjust the job parameters.

Note: Once you have created the low-resolution file, do not change the name of the high-resolution file. This is the file name that the CXP3535 Color Server looks for.

Note: The CXP3535 Color Server default HiRes folder used for APR and OPI is D:\Shared\HiRes. Paths other than the default path are defined on a per-job basis. You can define the APR path to any connected server or disk.

Important: OPI support is disabled by default. If you would like to enable the Spire OPI support, see OPI on page 422 for details.

Note: If your high-resolution files are not located in the CXP3535 Color Server default folder, specify the APR path(s), as described above.

256 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

5. Set other high-resolution job parameters as required.

6. Click Submit. The job is processed on the CXP3535 Color Server and sent to the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer for printing.

Organizing High-Resolution Files The High Res utility in the Resource Manager enables you to organize your high-resolution files. High-resolution files are required for the APR and OPI workflows. You can add or delete high-resolution files. You can also copy high-resolution files from a local hard disk, from the network, or from external media (for example, CD-ROM, Jazz drive or floppy). There is a default shared folder set on the system dedicated to high-resolution files. The folder resides in D:\Shared\HighRes.

Sample Job: Printing a Brochure Using the APR Workflow In this example, you can use APR to print a brochure that contains a high- resolution file.

Brochure

Note: If the masking data in the PS Image file defines a completely different part of an image than the masking data in the high-resolution file, no masking data is used.

For further information see High-Res on page 396.

VI (Variable Information) Workflow 257

The picture used in the sample brochure is a high-resolution file called milkmaid. In this example, it is assumed that you already created the low- resolution file milkmaid.e and that your brochure has already been designed in a DTP application using milkmaid.e.

To print a brochure using the APR workflow:

1. Place your high-resolution file milkmaid in the path: D:\Shared\High Res.

2. Print or download the brochure job from your client workstation to the CXP3535 Color Server. The job is processed on the CXP3535 Color Server and sent to the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer for printing.

VI (Variable Information) Workflow VI jobs are jobs in which the printed materials are individualized for specific recipients or purposes. These materials can include bills, targeted advertising and direct mailings.

VI jobs are composed of booklets, which are personalized copies of a document. A booklet can consist of several pages, but the entire document is targeted at a specific individual or address.

All VI jobs are constructed as a collection of individually RIPped elements that may differ from booklet to booklet, including text, graphics, pictures and page backgrounds. Pages are assembled from the RIPped elements just before printing. On the CXP3535 Color Server each element - text, graphic, picture, or page background is RIPped only once, regardless if the element is used once, several times, or even in every page of the VI job. If it is used more than once, then it is cached for further usage. Static elements and repeating variable elements are cached for re-use in the job and between jobs. Each set of elements associated with a particular job is assigned a unique name. This name enables the re-use of cached elements between jobs. In-line variable elements that are used only once, usually text, are not cached.

Note: On the CXP3535 Color Server, the APR workflow is functionally identical to the OPI workflow, so while the high-resolution image used in this example has a *.e extension, if it was an OPI image, it would have a alternative extension, such as *.lay.

258 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

VI jobs are sent to the CXP3535 Color Server in Creo Variable Print Specification or Xerox Variable data Intelligent Postscript Printware (VIPP) formats to be RIPped and printed. The CXP3535 Color Server can also process conventional PostScript files as VI jobs, although they are not truly VI documents.

The CXP3535 Color Server enables concurrent RIPing and printing of VI jobs known as Gallop. Large jobs do not have to be RIPped entirely to disk before printing. You can pre-define the number of pages to be processed before the engine starts to print. As soon as these pages are processed, printing starts while the rest of the job is streamlined through the CXP3535 Color Server. The Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer continues printing at its rated speed without interruption or slowing down until the job is finished.

VI jobs are created using VI authoring programs that support Variable Print Specification and Xerox VIPP formats. Most VI authoring programs can convert VI files to conventional PS files, which can also be processed by the CXP3535 Color Server, although less efficiently than Variable Print Specification and VIPP files. Each authoring program creates VI code that instructs the RIP where to place the VI elements and each authoring program does so in a slightly differing manner.

In VI Jobs, pre-RIPped re-usable elements are combined with inline elements during the RIP. Pages are assembled from the various elements at high speed on the CXP3535 Color Server as they are fed into the print engine.

The re-usable elements are stored in a cache folder (VI Elements folder). The CXP3535 Color Server only RIPs inline elements in subsequent jobs using the same re-usable elements. The cached re-usable elements are integrated into the job during the RIP.

In your VI authoring program (for example Creo Darwin), you can define several sub-jobs related to the same VI job, (for example different weekly runs, late additions or updates to a database). This is known as batch processing. The CXP3535 Color Server processes the first batch that arrives at the system, as described above. When processing following batches of the same job, the CXP3535 Color Server uses the already cached re-usable elements and adds new re-usable elements to the cache sub- folder. This saves the initial ramp-up time for processing and allow immediate processing at the rated printer speed.

For further information, see Organizing VI Elements on page 264.

VI (Variable Information) Workflow 259

Using Creo Variable Print Specification to Print a VI Job

To print a VI job:

1. Copy VI graphic elements to one of the defined APR folders on the CXP3535 Color Server.

2. Submit your job on the CXP3535 Color Server. Re-usable elements are identified, processed, and placed in the cache folder. They are ready for rapid assembly into pages and for multiple usage. Your VI job is processed and printed on the CXP3535 Color Server. The Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer prints RTP booklets at full engine speed working uninterrupted from the printer disk. Booklets are compiled concurrently while the printer prints. As pages are sent to the print engine, they are assembled from the various inline and re- usable elements on-the-fly. Once the job is completed, an RTP job is placed in the Storage Folder. This job is identified by the Variable Print Specification sub-job name. Booklet and Page descriptions, as well as inline elements, are embedded in the RTP job. All sub-job handling is done via this RTP job (for example adjusting Job Parameters).

VI Document Formats The desktop environment requires an authoring format to design, organize and generate VI documents. This format can be stand-alone covering all aspects of document design, data management, text capture, and so on. Or it can be an extension of an existing program that enables the creation of VI documents and VI jobs.

For further details, see APR and OPI File Formats on page 252.

Note: If an element is to be used more than once but with different clipping or scaling parameters, it is treated as a new page element and processed again. The cache is kept intact until the completion of the job, allowing for reuse of RIPped elements anywhere in the job. Elements may remain in the cache for subsequent jobs. You can also archive job elements. Deleting a job does not delete the cached job sub-folder. This must be done manually via the Resource Manager.

260 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

VIPP (2001) & PPML The CXP3535 Color Server supports VIPP (2001) and PPML formats and the features related to them, for example:

Efficient processing of VIPP (2001) & PPML jobs

Management mechanism for VIPP (2001) and PPML reusable elements

Importing of jobs in various VI formats to the CXP3535 Color Server

Importing of VI elements to the CXP3535 Color Server and submitting them for pre-cache

Viewing of VI elements in their structural hierarchy

Both PPML & VIPP2001 have a hierarchical structure. Document components are separated from their submission file and can be organized and stored in different levels of the hierarchical structure.

Variable Print Specification, VIPP and PPML are displayed under matching tabs the Elements Viewer window.

In PPML there is an ability to have different jobs in one PPML file. Thus, the display in the navigation pane varies from the way Variable Print Specification & VIPP appears.

VIPP (Variable data Intelligent Postscript Printware) The Variable data Intelligent Postscript Printware format was developed in 1993 by RX (Rank Xerox) Switzerland. The VIPP is PostScript based format that composes the VI pages during the processing stage. The VIPP is being used for various types of applications, but mostly for financial applications (which typically use the dynamic graph charting capability of VIPP) and for billing statements of banks, telephones, electricity, and so on.

In order to be able to utilize VIPP files on your CXP3535 Color Server, the VIPP software should be first installed on your system. This installation should be done by a service engineer. Contact your service provider for further information.

VI (Variable Information) Workflow 261

VIPP jobs are composed of the following four files:

VIPP software creates xgf and xgfc folders on your system. Within the xgfc folder, a number of sub-folders are created. Store the VIPP job files in these sub-folders as follows.

To print the VIPP job, import it (the *.DBF file) to the CXP3535 Color Server. The VIPP job is processed and printed.

PostScript Files The CXP3535 Color Server can also process conventional Postscript files as VI jobs, although they are not truly VI documents. All page elements are re-RIPped for each page. This workflow is suitable for simple, very short

File Name File Description

File.PS The PostScript Master Form, which holds all of the fixed elements from the original document.

File.JDT The Job Descriptor Ticket, which holds header and setup information for the job.

File.DBM The Database Master, which holds the VIPP coding.

File.DBF The Database File, which holds all the ASCII data to be merged. It should contain database information taken from the range of database records that were specified in the DataMerge dialog.

File Name Store in VIPP Sub-folder

File.PS formlib

File.JDT jdtlib

File.DBM formlib

File.DBF mislib

Variable Image Files imglib

262 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

run jobs. These jobs do not use a VI authoring tool at all. Instead, they use a mailmerge function in a MS Word document or a MS Excel spreadsheet.

Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) Creo Variable Print Specification is the Creo developed formal language designed for effective production of VI documents.

Creo Variable Print Specification is comprehensive and can specify a complete range of VI documents. It also provides the means for efficient implementation - fast, efficient data processing and storage prior to printing.

The following are Variable Print Specification job components:

Booklet A personalized copy of a document within a single print run where pages and / or elements within a page may vary from booklet to booklet.

Sub-job All copies of a particular document (for example, book, brochure, or flyer), within a single print run. On the CXP3535 Color Server, sub- jobs can be deleted, archived, or reprinted at any time. However, you can still maintain re-usable elements for future runs. Re-usable elements are cached elsewhere, so only the unique data, which is embedded in the job, is deleted.

Re-usable Elements Self-contained graphical entities that can be line art, text, raster images or a combination of these types. Re-usable elements are represented in PostScript and can be stored as EPS files when appropriate. Re-usable elements include clipping and scaling instructions as well as the image data.

Note: Grayscale TIFF and EPS images created in CMYK applications (such as PhotoShop) are counted correctly as B&W instead as Color in both the CXP3535 Color Server and the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer billing meters.

VI (Variable Information) Workflow 263

Re-usable elements can be used repeatedly in different pages, booklets and jobs. On the CXP3535 Color Server, all re-usable elements are processed once and cached as RTP elements for further re-use. They can then be re-used either within the sub-job itself, or in additional runs of sub-jobs.

Inline Elements Unique information is drawn from a database and is embedded in the sub-job. This data prints only once for individual booklets.

CXP3535 Color Server VI workflow

264 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Organizing VI Elements The VI Elements utility enables you to organize VI elements on your system. Jobs that include variable information require that VI elements (reusable elements) are stored in a specified location. This enables the CXP3535 Color Server to reuse these files when the job is printed for the first time and also for future jobs.

CXP3535 Color Server Job Parameters and VI Jobs You can adjust the job parameters of VI jobs via the Job Parameters window, just as with any other type of job.

Special considerations apply to VI jobs when adjusting some job parameters.

Imposition When imposing VI jobs:

Every booklet must have the same number of pages.

In the Step & Repeat method, when printing a single page booklet, the VI job does not print the same image repeatedly. Several booklets are printed on the same sheet and each record is printed on the sheet once.

Single Page VI Job, 3x2

For a booklet with several pages, the pages are printed in order along the length of the sheet.

For further information see VI Elements on page 397.

VI (Variable Information) Workflow 265

The next booklet is printed beside the first. After the sheets are cut, the booklets are aligned with their pages in the proper order.

3 Page VI Job, 3x1, duplex, 3 pages per record

Gallop The CXP3535 Color Server Gallop job parameter, located in the Print Settings tab, performs concurrent RIPing and printing of VI jobs. This results in reduced processing time.

Note: The above example uses the Step and Repeat method. There are no special considerations for VI jobs using Saddle Stitch and Perfect Bound methods.

For further details, see The Imposition Tab on page 168.

For further information see Gallop on page 138.

266 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Deleting Completed Jobs On high-volume VI jobs, where disk space may be an issue, you can set the CXP3535 Color Server to continuously delete pages once they have been successfully printed. This action is carried through the Services tab in the Job Parameters window in order to cause the continuous deletion of pages once they have been successfully printed.

Imposition Workflow Imposition is the process of positioning page images on sheets of paper in the printer (or in a digital printing press) as part of the process of producing finished documents.

In addition to page images, various marks can be added to the sheets in order to aid the production process (marks that show where the paper should be folded or trimmed).

Imposition does not affect the content of the individual page but rather the placement of the pages on a press sheet. Imposition is a combination of content and layout. The content is the pages that should be printed and the layout is the location of the page on the sheet and the printing marks (crop marks and fold marks).

On the CXP3535 Color Server, the imposition parameters are set on the Imposition tab of the Job Parameters window.

Whenever possible, imposition settings should be defined before RIPing a job. Changing key imposition settings (for example template) post RIP may require inefficient re-RIPing of your job.

You can use a CXP3535 Color Server virtual printer to predefine your imposition settings. When you create a new virtual printer or edit an existing one, define the imposition settings for that particular printer. These settings become the printer's default options and are applied to all jobs that use the printer.

Note: This sustains enough free disk space for the duration of the print run and affects the sub-job only. Moreover, it disposes of inline elements only and not re- usable elements. The Variable Print Specification file is also deleted.

For further details see Job Deletion on page 188.

For further information on Virtual Printers, see CXP3535 Color Server Network Printers on page 13.

Imposition Workflow 267

To submit jobs for Imposition on the CXP3535 Color Server:

1. Import the job to the CXP3535 Color Server.

2. Double-click on the job in the Storage Folder in the CXP3535 Color Server workspace. Or: Select a job in the Storage Folder, right-click and select Job Parameters. The Job Parameters window appears.

3. Select the Imposition tab in the Job Parameters window.

4. Adjust the required imposition parameters.

5. Click Submit to send your job to print. The job is processed on the CXP3535 Color Server and sent to the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer for printing.

Editing Imposition Jobs The RTP Job Editor window enables you to move pages within a job, delete pages of a job, insert pages of another job, or merge two entire jobs. You can use the RTP Job Editor with imposition jobs just as you would with any other RTP job.

When inserting or replacing pages, the new page should have the same size and orientation attributes as the old page.

To replace a page that is rotated 180, rotate the page in the DTP application and re-submit it to the CXP3535 Color Server. PDL files can be rotated using Adobe Acrobat.

Or, submit a two-page job with the corrected page as the second page in the job. In the Print Settings tab, set Print Method to be Duplex Head to Toe. After processing, the second page is rotated 180 and can be used as the replacing page in the Job Editor.

For further information see The Imposition Tab on page 168.

Note: Pre-Rip, jobs are edited using Adobe Acrobat. Post-Rip, only RTP jobs can be edited. Any changes to a job in the RTP job editor that require re-RIPing causes the job to fail, as there is no original PDL file to be re-RIPped.

For further details, see Editing RTP Jobs on page 359.

268 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Color Workflow Color job parameters can be accessed through the Color tab of the Job Parameters window. The Color tab provides you with tone compression tools such as brightness, contrast and gradation, as well as color tools, including rendering intent, ink saving, and RGB+CMYK Workflow. In addition, you can select the required screening methods for your job.

The tone compression tools and screening methods can be applied to your RTP jobs without requiring the CXP3535 Color Server to re-RIP the jobs. The color tools, however, should be applied prior to initial RIPing or your job will need to be re-RIPped.

CXP3535 Color Server Color Formats The CXP3535 Color Server accepts the following color formats:

RGB

CMYK

L a* b*

Spot Color

Greyscale

Duotone

To submit jobs for color adjustment on the CXP3535 Color Server:

1. Import the job to the CXP3535 Color Server workspace.

2. Double-click on the job in the Storage Folder.

3. Select the Color tab in the Job Parameters window.

4. Adjust the required color parameters.

5. Click Submit to send your job to print. The job is processed on the CXP3535 Color Server and sent to the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer for printing.

Further details are provided in The Color Tab on page 152.

Color Workflow 269

The Gradation Tool It is sometimes necessary to perform tone corrections when printing a job. These changes in gradation can include brightness, contrast and color balance adjustments throughout the tone range of an entire image, or in specific tone ranges.

Gradation tables you create using the Gradation tool are added to the Gradations list in the Color tab and may be applied to print jobs. The CXP3535 Color Server also enables you to visually check the effect of different gradation adjustments on RTP jobs prior to printing.

With CXP3535 Color Server Gradation, you can apply the default gradation table or another pre-configured gradation table to a job. You can also edit an existing table and save your changes. Gradation is an interactive function and changes are automatically applied to the displayed image.

The Gradation Window The Gradation window is used to create and edit gradation tables and to check the effect of different gradation adjustments on specific RTP jobs. These tables can then be applied to your jobs during job processing for tailored gradations.

Note: You can edit an existing gradation table, but you can not overwrite the default gradation table, DefaultGradTable.

270 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

To open the Gradation window:

From the Tools menu, select Gradation. The Gradation window appears.

Preview Button Clicking the Preview button in the Gradation window enables you to view how a page from a specific RTP job changes with changing Gradation tables or Gradation adjustments.

Note: Gradation is an interactive function. Gradation changes are automatically applied to the displayed image. The gradation table created is not automatically applied to the previewed job. You must use job parameters to assign a gradation table to a job.

Color Workflow 271

To view gradation adjustments:

1. Click the Preview button to expand the Gradation window.

272 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

2. Click the Browse button to select a job for display in the Preview window. The RTP Jobs window appears.

The displayed jobs are the RTP jobs listed in the Storage Folder.

3. Click on the RTP job you wish to modify.

4. Click OK.

Color Workflow 273

The job appears in the Gradations window.

5. Click the Show Original button (located at the bottom of the Gradation window) to toggle back and forth between edited and unedited gradation table views.

Note: The job name is listed at the top of the Preview viewer.

274 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

6. To view the effects of your gradation table changes on a different page of the RTP job, select the Page or Booklet you wish to view from their lists at the top of the Preview window. The selected page appears.

Gradation Table Box Upon opening the Gradation window, the default gradation table DefaultGradTable is selected.

This table consists of a 45 gradation curve, with Brightness and Contrast set to 0, Contrast Center set to 50 and all color separations selected.

If you have previously created or edited gradation tables, select the required gradation table from the Gradation table list. For viewing and editing purposes, the preconfigured settings of the selected gradation table are immediately applied to the RTP job on which you are working.

Separation Field The Separation field is used to select the separations to be edited for a particular gradation table. You can select one, all, or any combination of separations. Selecting a specific separation and a specific gradation control enables you to change the color balance for a specific tonal range.

The Gradations window appears with all separations selected.

This tools enables simultaneous editing of all separations.

To edit one, or several separations:

1. Click this button to clear all separations.

2. Click the individual separations you wish to edit (for example, select the cyan separation only).

For further details, see Preview Button on page 270.

Color Workflow 275

3. Change the separation parameters using the Gradation controls.

Your changes to gradation tables are immediately presented as changes to the gradation graph.

Gradation Graph CXP3535 Color Server gradation tables are represented visually in the Gradation window in the form of a graph:

The horizontal axis represents the tone values of the image before gradation changes (input). The vertical axis represents the tone values of the image after gradation changes (output). All four separations (CMYK) are shown, but if they have identical curves, the graphs appear as if there is only one curve.

Gradation Controls The gradation controls are used to adjust brightness in specific tone ranges.

Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the graph value of the active separation(s) for a specified section of the graph.

If only one separation is active, the gradation values are listed, ranging from -50 to 50. If more than one separation is active, no gradation values are listed.

Changes to gradation tables are immediately presented as changes to the gradation graph.

DefaultGradTable Modified (Input equals Output) Gradation graph

276 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Following are the gradation controls:

Start Moves the point of origin of the gradation graph at the highlight end along the horizontal or vertical axis. This affects the image file from 0% dot to 100% dot, where the greatest change is at 0% dot.

Highlight Changes brightness mainly in the highlights. This affects the image file from 0% dot to 50% dot, where the greatest change is at 25% dot.

Start Point Low Start Point High

Highlight Low Highlight High

Color Workflow 277

Mid Changes brightness mainly in the midtones. This affects the image file from 15% dot to 85% dot, where the greatest change is at 50% dot.

Shadow Changes brightness mainly in the shadows. This affects the image file from 50% dot to 100% dot, where the greatest change is at 75% dot.

Mid Low Mid High

Shadow Low Shadow High

278 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

End Moves the endpoint of the gradation graph at the shadow end along the horizontal or vertical axis. This affects the image file from 0% dot to 100% dot, where the greatest change is at 100% dot.

Brightness and Contrast Slider Controls The Brightness and Contrast slider controls are active only when all of the separations are selected.

Brightness

Brightness increases or decreases the luminance of the image. Increasing Brightness brightens the image and results in a concave curve. Decreasing Brightness darkens the image and results in a convex curve.

Move the Brightness slider to the right to increase brightness or to the left to decrease brightness. Or: Click the arrow button to select a value from the drop-down list.

End Point Low End Point High

Color Workflow 279

Contrast

Contrast increases the image contrast by making the highlights lighter and the shadows darker. It can also be used to decreases the contrast.

Move the Contrast slider to the right to increase contrast (S shaped curve), or to the left to decrease contrast (inverted S shaped curve). Or: Click the arrow button to select a value from the drop-down list.

Contrast Center

Contrast increases the image contrast mainly in the midtones. Using Contrast Center, you can adjust where the contrast is increased. To enhance contrast in highlights, the Contrast Center is shifted toward the highlights. To enhance contrast in shadows, the Contrast Center is shifted toward the shadows.

Set the image contrast, by adjusting the Contrast slider. Or: Set the Contrast Center slider to the right to enhance contrast in highlights, or to the left to enhance contrast in shadows. Or: Click the arrow button to increase or decrease the Contrast Center value. The Contrast Center value appears to right of the Contrast Center slider. Your change affects the gradation graph by moving the point where the curve changes from convex to concave.

Organizing Gradation Tables The Gradation window provides a number of options for organizing gradation tables, including Reset, Save, Delete and Save As.

If you work only with the default gradation table, the Reset and Save As options are activated. This option enables you to use the default gradation table as a base on which to build and save new gradation tables. When you work on gradation tables other than the default table, Save and Delete also become active.

Note: Contrast Center only affects the image if Contrast has also been adjusted.

280 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

The gradation organization options

Click Reset to reset all Gradation window settings. The gradation curve is reset to a 45 line.

Click Delete to delete the selected gradation table.

Click Save to save the specified gradation settings.

Click Save As to create new gradation tables by saving existing gradation tables with new names.

To create a new gradation table:

1. In the Gradations window, modify your gradation table as required.

2. Click Save As. The Save As window appears.

3. In the File name box, type the required name for the new gradation table.

4. Click OK. The gradation table is saved and added to the Gradation table list and to the Job Parameters Gradations list.

Note: You can not delete the DefaultGradTable.

Note: You can only save the default gradation table under a new name.

For further information, see Gradations on page 167.

Color Workflow 281

Exiting the Gradations Window

To exit the Gradations window:

Close the Gradation window and return to the CXP3535 Color Server workspace.

The Calibration Tool The purpose of color calibration is to achieve a consistent level of color quality. There are two calibration methods:

Target Calibration This calibration method enables you to calibrate the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer according to the following fixed density values:

Cyan 1.6

Magenta 1.597

Yellow 1.017

Black 1.8

These density values specify the maximal density value that will be achieved by the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer. The purpose of this color calibration method is to ensure that the same color quality is achieved for each Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer in use day after day.

Auto Adjusted Calibration This calibration method enables you to calibrate the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer according to a fixed percentage of the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer maximal density. This is an automatic calibration method which is adjusted to the printers current state.

To specify the required calibration method, see Color - Calibration Methods on page 415.

Note: Access Calibration tables through Tools>Calibration>Edit (for the Edit Calibration window) and Tools>Calibration>Info (for the Density Graph window).

282 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Connecting, Configuring and Calibrating the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer The calibration process involves printing a CMYK chart, measuring the density of the CMYK strips, and calibrating them to a required target. This process is achieved using the DTP34L Densitometer.

The X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer is a color measurement instrument that reports densitometric and dot data.

Before using the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer for the first time, perform the following:

Familiarize yourself with the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer Operations Manual.

Connect the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer.

Calibrate the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer.

You may also select Calibration from the Tools menu and click the DTP34 Tutorial - click and Learn animation icon, to learn how to use the DTP34L Densitometer correctly.

Color Workflow 283

Connecting the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer to the CXP3535 Color Server

The X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer must be interfaced directly with one of the computer's serial ports.

Power is supplied to the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer when the Power Supply is plugged into the AC wall receptacle. The X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer does not have an ON / OFF switch.

Configuring the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer

The LED indicates a variety of instrument operation conditions, such as calibration mode and operation.

For a complete list of all conditions reported by the LED, see the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer Operations Manual.

284 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Calibrating the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer

Frequency of Calibration

Your X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer should have a quick calibration at least once a day. A full calibration should be performed annually, during heavy usage to provide accurate measurements, or if the quick calibration consistently fails. Typically, the host computer prompts for an instrument calibration (amber LED) when required but the process can be invoked manually at any time. See the following procedure for details on the calibration process.

Positioning the Instrument on the Calibration Reference

Handle the reflection reference by the edges. Make sure that the reflection reference is free of dust, dirt and smudgemarks. To obtain the most accurate calibration, hold the instrument with consistent and nominal pressure during the calibration process.

Position the instrument on the designated location of the reflection reference (indicated by a dotted outline of the instrument). Do not move the instrument more than 0.25" (6.35mm) before reading the strip.

STATUS X

DTP34-100 #:

X-Rite Reflection Reference

C= .XX

AXXXXXXXX-XXXXX D: XXX

M= .XX Y= .XX

R

Color Workflow 285

Quick Calibration

A quick calibration can be performed at any time. The only required action is to scan the reflection reference as you would with any other strip. A quick calibration should only be performed after a full calibration has been done. The instrument comes from the factory with a full calibration already stored.

1. Position the X-Rite DTP34L Densitometer on the reference as previously mentioned.

2. Press and click the button and scan the reference to the opposite end. Release the button. The LED should indicate green if calibration was successful. If calibration fails (fast flashing amber LED), verify the strip is clean and re-read.

3. Place the reflection reference in its protective envelope and store away from light and heat.

Full Calibration

1. To manually invoke the calibration mode, click and hold the Instrument button for a minimum of three seconds. The LED slowly flashes amber when calibration is initiated.

2. Press and hold the button (if not previously held) and scan the reference to the opposite end. Release the button. The LED should indicate green if calibration was successful. If calibration fails, (fast flashing amber LED), verify the strip is clean and re-read.

3. Place the reflection reference in its protective envelope and store away from light and heat.

Using the Printer Calibration Wizard with the X-Rite DTP34L The Calibration window enables you to create and edit calibration tables, either through an automatic process or by editing an existing calibration table. This Wizard guides you in the use of the X-Rite DTP34L to create calibration tables.

Note: If the host computer initiated calibration (amber LED), skip to step 2.

286 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

The following calibration LUTs are provided:

None- applies no calibration table on the job.

SpireNormal - applies the factory default calibration table. Since this is a default LUT it cannot be overwritten.

SpireSaturated - applies the factory default saturated calibration table. This LUT applies a darker calibration table in comparison to the SpireNormal LUT. Since this LUT is a default LUT it cannot be overwritten.

Normal - initially the Normal LUT is identical to the SpireNormal LUT. This resemblance changes as soon as you calibrate your CXP3535 Color Server, and at the end of the calibration process choose to save your calibration tableas default. As a result, your calibration table is saved as the Normal LUT.

Saturated - initially the Normal LUT is identical to the SpireSaturated LUT. This resemblance changes as soon as you calibrate your CXP3535 Color Server, and at the end of the calibration process choose to save your calibration tableas default. As a result, your calibration table is saved as the Saturated LUT.

Note: Each time you save a calibration table as default, it is saved twice, once as Normal LUT, and once as the Saturated LUT.

Note: Each time you save a calibration table as default, it is saved twice, once as Normal LUT, and once as the Saturated LUT.

Color Workflow 287

To open the Calibration window:

1. From the Tools menu, select Calibration The Calibration window appears.

2. Click the Calibrate button to run the Printer Calibration Wizard. This Wizard guides you in the use of the X-Rite DTP34L to create calibration tables. Or: Select the calibration table from the Calibration Name list. Then select one of the following options:

Click Edit to edit the calibration table.

Click Delete to delete a calibration table.

Click Info for the Density Graph.

Click Close to end a test job and close the Calibration window.

288 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

To calibrate using the Printer Calibration Wizard:

1. In the Calibration window, click Calibrate. The Color Calibration Wizard window appears at the Printing Start Point Chart window. The Color Calibration Wizard appears.

2. This step in the Color Calibration Wizard prints the Start Point Density calibration chart.

3. Select the required input tray from the Select tray list. The Wizard checks for Letter or A4 LEF paper. If a particular paper size / quality is required, select the relevant tray.

Calibration charts can be printed on any paper size, including custom sizes. In case of small paper size (less than Letter / A4), each calibration chart is printed on two separate sheets. If a large size is selected, the calibration charts are printed close to the edge of the paper, allowing the operator to measure them without difficulty.

Note: Clicking the DTP34 Tutorial - Click & Learn icon displays an animation of the calibration process. Click this icon to learn how to use the DTP 34L Densitometer correctly.

Color Workflow 289

When Auto is selected, the Wizard selects the first tray containing either letter or A4 paper. If the correct paper is not found, the following message appears.

4. Refill the selected tray with the required paper and select the tray again from the list.

5. Select the required screening methodfrom the Select screening method list.

6. Select the required media typefrom the Media Type list.

7. Select the required number of copies from the Number of copies list.

8. Click the Print button. The Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer prints the Start Point Density calibration chart.

Note: Currently, the only supported screening method is line 200.

Note: The Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer achieves its best marking performance after printing several initial pages, particularly following cold starts. Print the first calibration charts in multiple copies and use one of the last charts printed. Set and print up to 25 copies of the Start Point charts to reach the best color performance.

290 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

9. Collect the chart from the printer. Step 2 of the Color Calibration Wizard appears.

10. While pressing down the button on the X-Rite DTP34L, align the X- Rite DTP34Ls head with the cyan arrows tip. The arrow is to the left of the cyan column on the Image Density Calibration Curve. Its tip intersects the semi-dotted line.

11. Press the button on the X-Rite DTP34L.

12. Sweep the X-Rite DTP34L over the cyan column.

Color Workflow 291

A beep sounds and a green light blinks when the scan is complete. A check mark appears over the cyan icon and instructions appear for the next sweep, this time for the magenta column.

13. After each color sweep, wait for the check mark to appear over the appropriate icon and follow the instructions as listed.

Note: Ensure that the separation columns on the Continuous Tone chart are scanned in the order they appear in the icons: Cyan>Magenta>Yellow> Black.

292 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

When all of the separation columns have been successfully scanned, a check mark appears next to all icons.

14. If at any stage the scanning has not been completed properly, click the Reset button and scan again.

15. If an error occurs during the scan, the following Error message appears.

16. Click OK and re-scan the charts.

Color Workflow 293

17. If at any time during your scan sequence, you would like to scan again, click the Reset button. Step 3 of the Color Calibration Wizard appears.

18. Click the Print button.

294 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

19. Collect the chart(s) from the printer. Step 4 of the Color Calibration Wizard appears.

20. Position the X-Rite DTP34L over the Image Density calibration chart and follow the scan sequence as prompted.

Color Workflow 295

A beep sounds when the scan is complete. A check mark appears over the cyan icon and instructions appear for scanning of the next column (magenta).

21. After each scan, wait for the check mark to appear over the appropriate icon and follow the instructions as listed.

Note: Ensure that the separation columns on the Image Density chart are scanned in the order they appear in the icons: Cyan>Magenta>Yellow>Black.

296 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

22. When all of the separation columns have been successfully measured, a check mark appears above all icons.

Color Workflow 297

Step 5 of the Color Calibration Wizard appears.

23. Select Save as and selectthe required name for the calibration table. Type your own or select one from the list. Or: Select As default table. The calibration table is saved as Normal.

24. Click Finish. The calibration table is saved. The CXP3535 Color Server actually saves your calibration table twice, as Normal and as Saturated:

Normal The table is balanced throughout the entire range.

Saturated The table is balanced through 80% of the tone range. From 80% onwards, all separations are balanced independently. Each separation is calibrated to the maximum density the printer can produce. For example, if a calibration table is saved with the name New, it is saved both as New and as NewSat.

298 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Editing Calibration Tables

To edit a calibration table:

In the Calibration window, under Calibration Name, select the table to edit. Then click the Edit button.

The Edit Calibration window appears.

Color Workflow 299

Separation

The Separation list is used to select the separations to be edited for a particular calibration table.

1. Select an individual separation to edit from the Separation list.

2. Change the separation parameters by adjusting file and printer values in the Value table. Changes to calibration tables are immediately presented as changes to the calibration graph.

Value Table

The Value table lists the tone values of the image. The File Value column lists the tone values in the image file. The Printer Value column lists the tone values of the image that are sent to the printer.

The File Value and Printer Value columns provide the x and y coordinates from which the calibration graph is drawn.

Editing Calibration Value Tables

To add an entry to the value table:

1. Highlight a row in the value table that you wish to add a value after.

300 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

2. Click the Add Entry button. The Add Entry dialog box appears.

3. Select the required values from the File and Printer lists.

4. Click OK. The value table is updated and the calibration graph is adjusted.

To change an existing value table:

1. Highlight a row in the value table that you wish to add a value after.

2. Double-click on the row. The Edit Entry dialog box appears.

3. Adjust the File and Printer values as required by clicking on the arrow buttons.

Note: Your changes to calibration tables are immediately presented as changes to the calibration graph.

Color Workflow 301

4. Click OK. The value table is updated and the calibration graph is adjusted.

To delete an entry from the value table:

1. In the value table, highlight the entry to be deleted.

2. Click the Delete Entry button. The entry is removed.

Calibration Graph

CXP3535 Color Server calibration tables are represented visually in the Edit Calibration dialog box in the form of a graph.

Calibration graph showing separations

Note: Your changes to calibration tables are immediately presented as changes to the calibration graph.

Note: Your changes to calibration tables are immediately presented as changes to the calibration graph.

302 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

The horizontal axis represents the tone values of the image in the image file. The vertical axis represents the tone values of the image that are sent to the printer. Upon opening the Edit Calibration dialog box, all four separations (CMYK) are shown. If the four separations have identical curves, the calibration graph appears as if there is only one curve.

To open or hide the calibration graph, click the arrow button.

Viewing Separations You can view one, all, or any combination of separations. The Edit Calibration dialog box appears with all separations selected.

It is possible to view one or more separations and adjust the values of other separations. The separations that you adjust are do not have to be those that you have chosen to view in the Edit Calibration dialog box.

To view one or several separations:

1. Click the clear button to clear all separations. The separations are cleared.

2. Click the individual separations you wish to view (for example, select the cyan separation only).

Color Workflow 303

Organizing Calibration Tables You can use the Save and Save As functions to organize your calibration tables.

To save an existing calibration table:

1. In the Edit Calibration dialog box, adjust calibration table values and parameters as required.

2. Click Save. The edited calibration table is saved with its original name.

To save a new calibration table:

1. In the Edit Calibration dialog box, adjust calibration table values and parameters as required.

2. Click Save As. The Save As dialog box appears.

3. In the File Name box, type the new calibration table name.

4. Click OK. The calibration table is saved with the new name.

5. Click Close to exit the Edit Calibration dialog box.

Note: When Save is clicked, new calibration settings override previous calibration table settings.

Note: You can not overwrite the default calibration tables, Spire Normal and Spire Saturated.

Note: Access Calibration tables through Tools>Calibration>Edit (for the Edit Calibration dialog box) and Tools>Calibration>Info (for the Density Graph window).

304 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Backing Up Calibration Tables

To back up a calibration table:

1. Browse to the ColorCalibrationDB folder, following the path C:\CXP3535\General\ColorCalibration\ColorCalibrationDB.

2. Open the ColorCalibrationDB folder.

3. Copy the required calibration table files to your backup location.

Color Workflow 305

Color Density Information

To view the Density Graph:

1. In the Calibration window, from the Calibration Name list, select the table for which you want to receive detailed color information.

2. Click the Info button.

306 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

The Density Graph appears. Upon saving the calibration, its results are also saved as graphic data and displayed in the Density Graph.

Calibration graph showing Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black separations.

Color Workflow 307

The Density Graph contains the following data:

Calibration name

Measured D-Max values for each separation

Target D-Max values for each separation

Minimum accepted density values for each separation (Xerox values)

View options: filtering by color - select which colors are shown / hidden

Calibration curves (target and measured) for each separation

Target is displayed as bold lines

Measured is displayed as thin lines

Index - emphasizes the difference between target lines and measured lines

Properties: presents the target calibration values, the screening method and the media type.

The Spot Color Editor Individual job pages can contain continuous tone (CT), line work (LW), and Spot color elements. The CXP3535 Color Server Spot Color Editor enables the editing of CMYK values of every Spot color in the Spot dictionary. You can edit these values without affecting the CT or LW page elements. It also enables you to create custom spot colors and to define fixed CMYK values for those spot colors. The CXP3535 Color Server supports HKS & Pantone 2000 Spot colors.

Note: When the density of the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer is lower than 80% of the target density, the following message appears: Attention: Below standard D-Max value(s) measured for . Standard (Minimum): , , , Measured: , , , .

Note: Spot (for example Pantone) colors are not effected by CMYK emulation. A spot color has the same appearance with any selected CMYK emulation.

If you would like to disable the application of the Spot Color Editor, see Color - Spire Spot Color Dictionary on page 414 for details.

308 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

To edit an existing pantone color:

1. From the Tools menu, select Spot Color Editor. The Spot Color Editor window appears with the CXP3535 Color Server's entire collection of colors listed.

2. Search for a particular color under Color.

3. Alternatively, from the Spot dictionary list, select the color dictionary that contains the color you wish to edit.

Note: Under Color, you cannot perform an exact query. This input stream only reads one character. For example, you want Cool Grey 4 and type Cool. As soon as you type C, the cursor only moves to Cool Grey 1 and will not continue to a more specific selection.

Note: Use the Pantone CV dictionary if you are working in QuarkXPress.

Color Workflow 309

4. Highlight the required color. The color's CMYK values and a color preview appear in the right hand side of the Spot Color Editor window.

5. Change the CMYK values as required.

6. Click the Apply button. The new color is added to the Custom color dictionary.

310 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

7. If the color name was already modified and is in the custom dictionary, the following message appears.

8. Click OK to overwrite the color name.

To create a new spot color:

1. In the Spot Color Editor window, click the New Color button. The New Spot Color dialog box appears.

2. Type the new color name as it exists in the PS file.

3. Adjust the CMYK values as required.

4. Click OK. The new color is added to the Custom dictionary.

Note: The Spot color names are case sensitive and should match the name as it appears in the DTP application.

PDF Workflow 311

To delete a spot color (from the custom dictionary only):

1. From the Spot dictionary list, select Custom Dictionary.

2. From the list of custom colors, highlight the color you wish to delete.

3. Click Delete. The following message appears.

4. Click Yes to delete the color.

PDF Workflow While printing PDF jobs with repeated elements, you can significantly decrease processing time by applying the PDF workflow.

The PDF Workflow caches the repeated elements in the PDF once, and reuses them as much as required without repeated processing.

In order to apply the PDF workflow, you need to select Enable PDF Optimization inthe Administration window (under Preferences).

In addition, the PostScript file needs to be distilled using the Adobe Acrobat Distiller application in order for the repeated elements to be marked as repeated in the PDF file.

If you do not have the Adobe Acrobat Distiller application installed on your client workstation, you may use the Adobe Acrobat Distiller 5.0 application located on the CXP3535 Color Server.

To distill a PS file on the CXP3535 Color Server:

1. In your client workstation, copy the required PostScript file.

2. Browse the network to the CXP3535 Color Server, and paste the file to D:\Shared.

Important: Verify that in your Acrobat Distiller settings, Optimize for Fast Web View is selected (in Acrobat 4.0 the corresponding option is Optimize PDF).

312 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

3. On the CXP3535 Color Server station, click the Start button and follow the path: Programs>Acrobat Distiller. The Acrobat Distiller window appears.

4. From the Settings menu, select Job Options.

PDF Workflow 313

The Job Options window appears.

5. In the General tab, verify that Optimize for Fast Web View is selected and click Cancel. If this option is not selected select the Optimize for Fast Web View check box and click OK.

6. From the File menu select Open. The Acrobat Distiller - Open PostScript file window appears.

7. Browse to the required PS file and select it. Then, click Open. The Acrobat Distiller - Specify PDF File Name window name appears.

8. The default name is the PS file name. You can change it in the File name box.

9. Verify that the file is saved in D:\Shared.

10. Click Save. Your file is distilled and a PDF file is created.

11. In the CXP3535 Color Server application, from the Job menu, select Import.

314 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

12. Import the PDF file for printing.

Export as PDF2Go PDF2Go is a port through which you can export RTP files and convert them to PDF during export.

The system is capable of exporting jobs (both before and after processing), which are standard PDF files. For an exported RTP job, the PDF file includes the rasterized data of the job.

The operation converts the RTP information to raster files that can be encapsulated in a PDF format. This process ensures that the file can be processed and printed on any PDF printer.

While exporting as PDF2Go, a running bullet starts to move from right to left in the top-right server-printer animation of the workspace.

To export as PDF2Go:

1. Select a file in the Storage Folder, right-click, and from the menu select Export as PDF2Go. The PDF2Go window appears.

Tip: You may create a shortcut to the Acrobat Distiller on the CXP3535 Color Server desktop. This shortcut may be used to drag and drop and files onto the Acrobat Distiller for quick distilling. To create a shortcut, simply click the Start button on your Windows desktop, and follow the path Programs>Acrobat Distiller. Then, Right-click Acrobat Distiller and follow the path Send To>Desktop (create shortcut).

Printing PrePress Files - Graphic Art Port (GAP) 315

2. Browse to the required location and click the Save button. The file is saved as a PDF under the job's name, in the selected location.

PDF Optimization You may use the PDF Optimization utility to optimize the RIP process of PDF files with repeated elements (which are marked as repeated in the PDF file) and consequently decreases the processing time significantly.

Printing PrePress Files - Graphic Art Port (GAP) The GAP is a port through which you can import various file formats used in the Graphic Arts industry. GAP files are already rasterized. The CXP3535 Color Server needs only to prepare the files for printing, which means adjusting the file resolution and rotation.

Importing GAP Files During the import of the assigned job file, the file is converted to a PDF that is displayed in the CXP3535 Color Server queues. The PDF can be programmed and printed as any other PDF file.

Note: When exporting PDL files as PDF, the file is converted to PDF using the Acrobat distiller. You can export every type of file, except for RTP jobs that were originally VI jobs.

For further information see PDF Optimization on page 422.

Note: To print a specific page, import the assigned file of the specific page.

316 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

Supporting Graphic Arts Port (GAP) Files The CXP3535 Color Server can import and convert the following file types:

Brisque jobs

TIFF

TIFF IT

CT / LW

The system converts these file types to pre-rasterized PDF files. GAP PDF files behave the same as any other PDF file and have the same Job Ticket operations.

Gap File Structure

TIFF IT A TIFF IT file has 3 components:

CT.TIF

LW.TIF

FP (final page) file, which combines CT.TIF and LW.TIF

To import a TIFF IT file to the CXP3535 Color Server, first import the FP file. During import, the file is converted to a PDF, which is displayed in the CXP3535 Color Server queues. The PDF can be programmed and printed as any other PDF file.

CT, LW, TIFF The components of a Brisque Job and TIFF IT, which are: CT, LW and TIFF, can be imported and printed separately to the CXP3535 Color Server.

Note: The CXP3535 Color Server supports GAP files that are in composite format only.

Scan Back Workflow 317

Rasterized Brisque Jobs All rasterized Brisque jobs have a typical structure. Each job contains an assigned file with one or more pages (in case of a multiple job). Also, every page contains its own assigned file, which combines LW and CT.

To import a Brisque job to the CXP3535 Color Server, import the assigned file of the job.

To print a specific page, import the assigned file of the specific page.

Scan Back Workflow The Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer enables you to scan jobs and save them on the CXP3535 Color Server hard disk.

To use the CXP3535 Color Server scan back option:

1. Place the job you wish to scan on the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer platen or on the DADF.

2. On the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer touch screen, select the Main menu tab.

3. Select the Scan option.

4. From the template options, select the Spire_BW template to scan in black & white. Or: Select the Spire_Color template to scan in color.

5. Click the Start button to start scanning. The scanned job is automatically saved on the CXP3535 Color Servers under D:\ScanToSpire\Spire_Color or D:\ScanToSpire\Spire_BW respectively.

Note: The CXP3535 Color Server does not support Spot colors (for example Pantone) as part of the incoming job. In other words, the system does not consume Brisque jobs, which contain colors other than C, M, Y, and K.

Note: Color jobs are saved as Jpeg files and BW jobs are saved as Tiff files.

318 Chapter 6 Workflows & Tools

The job is saved under the name ScanJob along with the next sequential number as a suffix. For example, the first scanned job is ScanJob001.

6. In the CXP3535 Color Server, browse to D:\ScanToSpire and double click the Spire_Color or Spire_BW folder (according to the template you have selected).

7. Select the required job and copy it to your local hard disk through the network.

Note: When the suffix number reaches 999 it restarts.

Note: The D:\ScanToSpire folder is shared with read-only permissions.

Managing Jobs

Overview ........................................................................................320

Queue Manager..............................................................................320

Storage Folder ................................................................................332

Export a Job as InSite ......................................................................348

Job Preview & Editor .......................................................................349

Job Ticket Report ............................................................................368

Thumbnail Window ........................................................................370

Managing Disk Space......................................................................371

320 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Overview This chapter explains the various operations that can be performed from the CXP3535 Color Server queues, and in the Storage Folder. It also provides information on managing jobs and disk space.

The Job Preview & Editor tool is also explained in this chapter. This tool is provided to enable you to view the previews of your jobs and edit RTP jobs if required.

Queue Manager After entering the CXP3535 Color Server, jobs reside in the Queue Manager (which includes both the In Process and In Print queues) or in the Storage Folder (depending on the selected job flow).

The In Process queue lists all the jobs that are waiting to be processed and the job currently being processed.

The In Print queue lists all the jobs that were processed successfully and are waiting to be printed, and the currently printing job. The In Print queue also lists Frozen jobs (jobs for which the appropriate paper stock is not available (for example, the correct paper type, paper size or paper weight is missing).

Each queue holds jobs in the order they entered it. The top job in the queue is the Running job, while all others are Waiting jobs. At any time, you may view information regarding the number and status of the jobs in the queues, reorder the jobs or suspend/resume the queue.

Queue Manager 321

After startup, the Queue Manager is displayed. The Queue Manager consists of the In Process queue and the In Print queue.

Each queue holds jobs in the order they entered it. The top job in the queue is the Running job, while all others are Waiting jobs.

If required, you can change the order of Waiting jobs in the queues or view/ edit the parameters of a job.

To close the Queue Manager:

Click the Queue button on the Pathways panel. Or: Click the Close button on the window's title.

Note: In the In Print queue, in cases of very short jobs, several jobs may be Running. The jobs in the Running state are listed first and printed in the order they are listed.

322 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

To display the Queue Manager:

From the Tools menu, select Queue Manager. Or: Click the Queue button on the Pathways panel.

The In Process Queue After submitting PDL files (or re-submitting PDL jobs), the In Process queue lists the files to be processed.

Status icons indicates a running job

indicates a waiting job

Type Column Indicates the file format of the PDL job (for example, PS, PDF, VPS)

Title Column Indicates the name of the file to be printed.

Sender Column Indicates the user name of the system from which this file originated.

Note: Submitting a file whose name already exists in the CXP3535 Color Server automatically adds a sequential number to the file name (for example, submitting a file called LOBSTER while such a file already exists renames it to LOBSTER1).

Queue Manager 323

Submitted Column Indicates the date and time this job was first submitted to the CXP3535 Color Server.

Pages Column Indicates the number of pages to be processed in a PDF job.

Sets Column Indicates the number of copies to be printed.

The In Print Queue Once a file has been processed successfully, it moves to the In Print queue and waits to be printed or to the Storage Folder (depending on the current job flow or virtual printer).

Status icons Indicates a running job.

Indicates a waiting job.

Indicates a frozen job.

Note: If the DTP application supported it, the number of pages is indicated for other PDL jobs.

Note: A frozen job is a job for which the appropriate paper stock is not available, for example, the correct paper type, paper size or paper weight is not available.

324 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Type Column Indicates RTP (Ready To Print).

Title Column Indicates the name of the PDL file (that is, without the extension).

Sender Column Indicates the user name of the system from which this file originated.

Submitted Column Indicates the date and time this job was first submitted into the CXP3535 Color Server.

Pages Column Indicates the number of pages to be printed.

Sets Column Indicates the number of copies to be printed.

For further details on operations on the jobs residing in the Queue Manager, see Handling Jobs in Queues on page 328.

Queue Manager 325

Queue Manager Status Panel Information

The In Process and In Print panes indicate the following:

The current number of jobs in the respective queue (for example, 1).

If a job is currently processed/printed, the name of the job (for example, frog1) and a process indicator are displayed. If no job is processed/printed, it displays No jobs running.

The number of pages already processed/printed (for example, 1) and the total number of pages in the job (for example, 11).

If you click the arrow, a pop-up menu appears. Selecting Time from the menu enables you to view the amount of time (in minutes) that passed since the job started running will also be indicated.

Note: On the In Process pane, the total number of pages is indicated for PDF jobs. If the DTP application supported it, the number of pages is indicated for other PDL jobs.

326 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Job Batching Workflow The Job Batching workflow streams several jobs into a single batch to prevent the printer from cycling down between jobs. Every job that enters the In Print queue is checked whether it can be streamed to the previous job.

If a job can be streamed to the previous job, the jobs icon is changed to a running state and it prints without a cycle down.

A job that cannot be streamed to the previous job prints after the print engine cycles down. Jobs that follow this type of job can be streamed to it. The operation of job batching can be enabled or disabled in the Print Queue Manager utility in the Preferences folder, in the Administration window. This feature saves printing time, especially for a large number of short / small jobs.

Jobs that cannot be combined to one batch are:

Collated and uncollated jobs.

Jobs with different output trays.

Offset and non Offset jobs.

Jobs with different staple positions.

How job batching is set on the CXP3535 Color Server

1. The files arrive to the In Print queue.

2. The job is validated by the CXP3535 Color Server. If it is fit for streaming to the current batch, the job is added to the batched list and runs as a batched job (without cycle down). If it is not fit for the current batch, it remains on the waiting list and is not run as a batched job (its icon remains the waiting icon).

3. Merged files are automatically batched with the upper jobs on the queue.

4. If the waiting list order changed and the previous job was not merged, then the job at the top of the waiting list is checked.

Enabling and disabling of job batching is specified in the Administration window under Preferences. See also Print Queue Manager on page 425.

Queue Manager 327

Reordering Jobs in Queues Rearranging a queue enables you to set a new processing or printing order.

You may do the following:

Promote a job

Promote a job to top of the queue

Demote a job

Demote a job to the bottom of the queue

To reorder jobs in queues:

1. Right-click a job in the In Process or In Print queue, and select the required option from the menu. Or: From the Job menu, select the required option from the Reorder Jobs options.

2. Select one of the following options:

To move the selected job one step up in the queue, select Promote.

To move the selected job to the top of the queue, select Promote to top.

To move the selected job one step down in the queue, select Demote.

To move the selected job to the bottom of the queue, select Demote to bottom.

Note: All actions are valid for a single job only.

Note: You may also drag the job to the required place.

Note: The job is placed below the Running job.

328 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Suspending and Resuming Queues If required, you can stop a queue (that is, rendering it temporarily inactive) and then later continue its operation. To do so, use the suspend/ resume switch or select an option from the Control menu.

To suspend a queue:

Select the red square in the suspend/resume switch. The button switches to suspend mode. Processing/printing stops after the current job has finished running.

To resume a queue:

Select the green arrow of the suspend/resume switch. The button switches to resume mode. The top job in the queue starts processing/printing.

Handling Jobs in Queues You may do the following from the In Process and In Print queues:

Abort a running job

Move waiting jobs to the Storage Folder

Delete jobs

View and modify the parameters of a job

View the job history (open the Job History window)

Run a waiting job immediately

Details about the above actions are provided in the following sections.

resume suspend mode mode

Note: You can perform the above mentioned activities (except for Abort), only if the job is waiting in the queue. If the job is active, other selections are not available.

Queue Manager 329

To select more than one job:

To select all the jobs in the active window, choose Select All from the Selection menu (or press CTRL+A). To select any item, and clear any selected item, choose Invert selection from the Selection menu.

Aborting a Running Job

To stop processing/printing a running job:

1. Select the required running job in the In Process or In Print queue.

2. From the Job menu, select Abort. Or: Right-click the job, and from the menu select Abort. The job is removed from the queue to the Storage Folder.

The Aborted Jobs status is assigned to the job and the next job in the queue starts running.

Note: Some actions may be performed also by dragging the job(s) from a queue to the Storage Folder, or vice versa.

330 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Moving Waiting Jobs to Storage To postpone processing/printing of one or several Waiting jobs, you may use the Move to storage option.

To move waiting jobs to storage:

1. Select one or several jobs in the In Process or In Print queue.

2. Right-click the job, and from the menu select Move to storage.

Or: Drag the job(s) from the queue into the Storage Folder. The job(s) are removed from the In Process or In Print queue to the Storage Folder.

The Held Jobs status is assigned to the job(s).

Note: If you have selected several jobs, from the Job menu select Move to storage.

Note: To return jobs to their original queue(s), right-click the job, and from the menu select Submit (or drag the jobs to the relevant queue).

Queue Manager 331

Deleting Jobs You may delete one job, or select several jobs to be deleted and delete them at once.

To delete one job:

1. Right-click the required job in the Queue Manager or Storage Folder, and from the menu select Delete. Or: Press DEL on your keyboard. The following message appears.

2. Click Yes. The selected job is removed from the In Print or In Process queue.

To delete several jobs:

1. Select the required jobs in the Queue Manager or Storage Folder, and from the Job menu select Delete. The following message appears.

Note: When you select a job to be deleted, the system indicates its name.

Note: Once a job is deleted, it needs to be re-submitted for processing and printing. To temporarily remove jobs from a queue, use Move to Storage (see Moving Waiting Jobs to Storage on page 330).

332 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

2. Click Yes. The selected jobs are removed.

Viewing and Editing the Job Parameters

To view / edit the job parameters:

1. Right-click the required job in the Queue Manager or Storage Folder, and from the menu, select Job Parameters. The Job Parameters window appears.

2. You may now edit the job parameters as required.

Storage Folder The Storage Folder may contain jobs that:

Completed printing

Were moved to the Storage Folder (or Aborted) during processing (or printing)

Failed to complete processing or printing

Were imported or downloaded directly from the client to the Storage Folder (that is, using the Spool & Store workflow)

Note: When you select several jobs to be deleted, the system indicates the number of jobs you are deleting.

Note: Once a job is deleted, it needs to be re-submitted for processing and printing. To temporarily remove jobs from a queue, select Move to Storage (see Moving Waiting Jobs to Storage on page 330).

Note: In the Queue Manager, you may edit only Waiting jobs (not Running). You may also suspend the queue for editing by clicking the Suspend / Resume button. If the changes were applied in the In Print queue, and applying them requires re-RIPing of the job, the job will be automatically placed in the In Process queue.

For further details on the Job Parameters window and job parameters, see Setting Job Parameters on the CXP3535 Color Server on page 126.

Storage Folder 333

To close the Storage Folder:

Click the Storage button on the Pathways panel. Or: Click the Close button on the window title.

To open the Storage Folder:

From the Tools menu, select Storage Folder. Or: Click the Storage button on the Pathways panel. The Storage Folder appears, initially, it contains no jobs.

At any time, you may view information regarding the number and status of the jobs in the Storage Folder, sort and filter the list of jobs, or switch view modes.

Note: After startup, the Storage Folder is displayed by default.

334 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Storage Folder Status Panel Information The In Storage pane indicates the number of jobs of each status currently residing in the Storage Folder.

Handling Jobs in the Storage Folder In the Storage Folder you may preform the following actions:

Submit a job

Preview and edit a job, using the Job Preview &Editor

View and modify the parameters of a job

Archive a job (retrieve is also explained in this section)

Duplicate a job

Delete a job

View the jobs history (open the Job History window)

Export as PDF2Go

Note: If a cross-reference is not provided, the details are provided in this section.

See Job Preview & Editor on page 349.

See Viewing and Editing the Job Parameters on page 332.

See Deleting Jobs on page 331.

See Storage Folder on page 332.

See Export as PDF2Go on page 314.

Storage Folder 335

View the Job Ticket Report

View the Preflight report

Export a job as InSite

Submitting Jobs

To submit a job for printing:

Right-click the required job, and from the menu select Submit. Or: Drag the job(s) from the Storage Folder and drop them into the appropriate queue. RTP Jobs are submitted to the In Print queue; all other jobs are submitted to the In Process queue.

Duplicating Jobs

To copy a selected job in the Storage Folder:

1. Right-click a job and from the menu select Duplicate. The following message appears.

See Job Ticket Report on page 368.

See Preflight Report on page 194.

See Export a Job as InSite on page 348.

336 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

2. Click Yes to continue. The selected file is duplicated, and is given the name of the original job followed by _dup.

Archiving and Retrieving Jobs In order to maintain free disk space, it is recommended that you backup jobs and their related files to an external server, and then delete them from the Storage Folder.

This backup process is called archive. The archived jobs and their related files can later on be retrieved for further usage.

Archiving and Retrieving VI Jobs If a job includes VI elements, these should also be archived and retrieved with the job. The archive and retrieve of VI elements is performed through the VI Elements utility in the Administration window.

To archive/ retrieve a VI job, first archive/ retrieve the VI elements.

You may also set a default archiving path. Once the path is set, and Archive is selected from the Job menu, the Archive window browser will be directed to the predefined path. This path is set in the Administration window under preferences.

Note: Duplicating an RTP job creates a new PDF version of the job. You cannot duplicate an RTP job that was modified in the Job Preview & Editor since it contains RTP data only.

See VI Elements on page 397 for details. Then, archive/ retrieve the job as explained in this section.

Storage Folder 337

To archive a job to an external server:

1. In the Storage Folder, right-click the job you would like to archive, and from the menu select Archive. The Archive job window appears.

2. Browse to the required location, and click the Save button. A cabinet file (compressed ZIP) that contains all files related to the archived job is created at the selected location.

3. Click the Alerts button on the Pathways panel to open the Alerts window, and verify that a completed processing of archive message appears.

4. You may now delete the job.

Note: The archived job is archived with its Job Parameters and Job History windows. When retrieved, the archived job retains the original job name, not the name assigned when archived.

338 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

To retrieve an archived job:

1. From the Job menu, select Retrieve from Archive. The Retrieve window appears.

2. Browse to the location of the archived job, select the related cabinet file, and click the Open button.

The selected job appears at the top of the list in the Storage Folder. It is assigned a Held status.

3. Click the Alerts button on the Pathways panel to open the Alerts window, and verify that a completed processing of restore message appears.

Note: Find the job using the archived job name.

Note: The files related to the job (for example, PDL) are also retrieved. The Job Parameters and Job History windows related to the job prevail. The cabinet file is not deleted from its location.

Storage Folder 339

Viewing the Job History

To view the job history:

Right-click the required job in the Queue Manager or Storage Folder, and from the menu select Job History. The Job History window appears.

Filtering the List Each job in the Storage Folder is assigned one of the following statuses:

By default, the Storage Folder lists jobs of all statuses (all status buttons are selected).

You may filter the list in order to list only jobs of one or several statuses, while not listing jobs of other statuses.

For further details on the Job History window, see Job History on page 452.

Icon Status Indicates that

Completed Jobs The job completed printing.

Held Jobs The job was moved from the Queue Manager to the Storage Folder by the operator, or automatically by the current job flow or Virtual Printer.

Failed Jobs The job failed to complete processing or printing.

Aborted Jobs The job was aborted by the operator when it was running in the Queue Manager.

Note: The check mark emphasizes that jobs of this status appear in the list.

340 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

To filter the list:

1. Click any status button (for example the Completed Jobs status) that contains a check mark to remove jobs of that status from the list.

The list updates accordingly.

Storage Folder 341

2. Select any status button in order to list such jobs (for example, the following lists Held jobs only).

Switching List View Modes By default, the jobs are listed in the Storage Folder along with various details, but you may choose to view the jobs as Large Icons, Small Icons, a List, or a list with Details.

Note: If all the button selections are cleared, no jobs are listed.

342 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

The Details View

This view is the default view mode.

To switch to another view mode:

1. Click the View drop-down icon.

2. Select the required view mode from the list.

The list updates according to the selected view mode.

Note: Sorting and resizing of columns is relevant for this mode only.

Storage Folder 343

The Large Icons View

In the Large Icons view, the icons are listed from the bottom right corner to the top left corner.

The Small Icons View

In the Small Icons view, the icons are listed from the bottom right corner to the top left corner.

344 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

The List View

In the List view, icons are listed from the bottom left corner to the top left corner.

Sorting the List When the jobs are listed using the Details view mode, you may sort the list by its column headers.

By default, the list is sorted by the order the jobs entered the Storage Folder.

Storage Folder 345

To sort the Details list:

1. To sort by one of the column headers (for example, Type), click the header once for ascending order.

346 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

2. Click again for descending order.

Resizing Columns In the Details view mode, the Status, Type, Title, Sender, Submitted, Pages, and Size columns appear in the Storage Folder by default. If required, you may resize columns (or even minimize columns so they are not viewed at all).

Note: After sorting, new jobs arrive at the top.

Storage Folder 347

To resize the columns:

1. Click the cursor on the right border of the required column (for example, Sender). The cursor switches shape.

2. Drag the cursor to the right to enlarge the size of the column, or to the left to decrease the size of the column. In the following case, the column was minimized so it will not be viewed at all. To retrieve the column, drag the cursor to the right.

348 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Export a Job as InSite Creo Synapse InSite provides an Internet-based communication between you and your customers and enables remote proofing and approval.

If your site includes a Creo Synapse InSite server, exporting your job as InSite from the CXP3535 Color Server, allows you and your customers to proof online with geographically dispersed users simultaneously, append annotations or comments, and approve or reject pages over the World Wide Web using a standard browser. After the RTP job is created on the CXP3535 Color Server, it can be exported as InSite from the Storage Folder. When the customer logs on (using their unique username and password), they see the status of their jobs, view a thumbnail of all pages in each job, and quickly identify which pages require further corrections. This is enabled due to the customers ability to measure color density, make annotated comments, and approve pages. The online proofing cycle is shortened and accurate, and consequently, the need for reprints is reduced.

To export a job as InSite:

1. Select the required job in the CXP3535 Color Server Storage Folder.

2. Right-click the job and from the menu, select Export as InSite Job. The InSite window appears.

3. Browse to the required location and click Save. A Brisque job is created in the selected location.

4. You may now register the files on the InSite server and start the approval cycle.

Job Preview & Editor 349

Job Preview & Editor The Job Preview & Editor tool enables you to preview an RTP job for close inspection before printing. If required, you may also delete, move or add pages to a job using this tool. While you are navigating to the various pages of a job, you may view the job thumbnails, or, in case of an imposed job, you may view the actual imposed sheets, including the number of pages on each sheet, their orientation, crop marks and fold marks.

To open the job editor:

Right-click any RTP job in the Storage Folder, and from the menu select Job Preview&Editor. The Job Editor window appears, displaying the first page of the selected job.

350 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

The Job Editor Tabs The Job Editortabs displayed on the left pane of the Job Editor window, enable you to switch between views:

The Booklets Tab The Booklets tab (default for non-imposed RTP jobs) displays the booklet(s) included in this job and the names/numbers of the pages within each booklet.

The following example displays the Booklets tab of a VI job that includes several booklets (each booklet represents a complete set of the job that contains the personalized information for that set).

Job Preview & Editor 351

The Thumbnails Tab The Thumbnails tab displays the thumbnails of the selected booklet.

The following example shows the Thumbnails tab displaying a VI job that includes several booklets. The pages in each booklet are listed under the number of the booklet.

The Imposed Sheets Tab The Imposed sheets tab is available only for imposed RTP jobs. This tab displays the imposed sheets along with the number of pages on each sheet and was designed to enable you to view and check your imposition parameters. Therefore, you cannot edit the imposed job using the Imposed sheets tab. To edit imposed jobs, use the Thumbnails or Booklets tabs, and then return to the Imposed sheets tab to view the updated imposed layout.

If you would like to view the job imposition details, click the Show info button. A pop-up window appears displaying the imposition parameters such as the sheet size, trim size, imposition template / method, margins, gutters and spine trim size.

352 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

The following example shows the Imposed Sheet tab displaying an imposed job. You can view the number of imposed sheets in the job and the number of pages on each sheet.

Notes:

1. In case of a VI job, the booklet number appears in addition to the page number. For example: Booklet 1 Page 15.

2. In case of a duplex job, each sheet is displayed twice, once for Side A, and once for Side B. For example: Sheet 1 Side A.

Job Preview & Editor 353

The Job Editor Buttons

The Navigation Buttons The Navigation buttons enable you to display other pages of the current job:

The First Page button - click this button to preview the first page of the job.

The Previous Page button - click this button to preview the previously viewed page.

The Next Page button - click this button to preview the following page.

The Last Page button - click this button to preview the last page of the job.

The Preview Buttons By default, when you open the Job Editor, the first page of the job is displayed (in Fit to page mode). The Preview buttons enable you to switch the display mode of the page:

The Max details button - click this button to magnify the required area in the preview to maximum details. After magnifying, click the preview to return to its previous view. You may then magnify a different area in the preview. If you navigate to another page, the view returns to Actual Size.

The Actual size button - click this button to view a preview of the job in its actual size. If you navigate to another page, the view retains the Actual Size mode.

The Fit to page button - click this button to preview full pages. If you navigate to another page, the view retains the Fit to page mode.

Note: If the first page of a booklet is accessed, navigation continues to the previous booklet. If the last page of a booklet is accessed, navigation continues to the next booklet.

Note: If the page is larger than the display, use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars.

354 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Viewing Pages in the Job Editor

To display a page in booklets view:

Double-click the name of a page on the Booklets tab. (for example, Page 2) to display it. The page is displayed (and its number in the booklet list is highlighted).

Job Preview & Editor 355

To display a job in thumbnails view:

1. Select the Thumbnails tab. A small and approximate version of the job appears.

2. Use the scroll bar, as required, to view all of the pages.

3. Use the vertical scroll bar to view additional thumbnails.

4. If required, resize the thumbnail area to view thumbnails side by side (you may then use the horizontal scroll bar to view additional thumbnails). Then double-click the thumbnail of the page you wish to display.

356 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

The page is displayed (and the number below its thumbnail becomes highlighted).

Job Preview & Editor 357

To display an imposed job in the Imposed sheet view:

1. In the Storage Folder, right-click the required imposed RTP job, and from the menu select Job Preview&Editor. The Job Editor window appears, and the job is displayed in the Imposed sheets tab.

358 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

2. If you would like to view the imposition settings of the job, click the Info button. The related imposition information appears.

3. To close the imposition information, click the Info button again.

4. If you would like to edit the job, select the Booklets or Thumbnails tab and edit the job as required.

See Editing RTP Jobs on page 359.

Job Preview & Editor 359

Editing RTP Jobs You may perform the following:

Move pages within the job

Delete pages from the job

Insert pages from another job

Merge entire jobs

Moving Pages within a Job If required, you may move a page to another location within the job (for example, switching the locations of pages 2 and 3).

To move pages within a job:

1. Click on the page you would like to move (for example, page #3).

360 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

2. Drag the page to a target location between two adjacent pages.

Note: The red marker indicates where the page will be inserted.

Job Preview & Editor 361

The moved page is inserted in the required location, and the page numbers update accordingly.

Deleting Pages from a Job

To delete a page from a job:

1. Click on the page you would like to delete.

2. Click the Delete button or press DEL. The page is deleted and the page numbers update accordingly.

Merging Jobs You may copy a page from a job into the job to be edited or you may copy all the pages from a job and append them to the job to be edited.

To merge jobs:

1. In the Job Editor window, open the job that appears first in the merged job.

original order new order

362 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

2. Click the Select Job button. The RTP Jobs window appears.

3. Select the job that you want to merge with the job selected in step 1 from which you want to copy one or several pages.

4. Click OK.

The Thumbnails display area splits in two, and the thumbnails of the other job are displayed below those of the job to be edited.

Note: Only RTP jobs of which the page size and orientation are identical to that of the job to be edited are displayed.

job to be edited

other job

Job Preview & Editor 363

5. Click the Close Job button to close the job in the lower Thumbnails pane.

Copying a Page from the Second Job Once the thumbnails of the second job are displayed, you may copy a page from this job and insert it into the first job.

To copy a page from the second job:

1. Select the page that you wish to copy (for example, page #2).

364 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

2. Drag the page to the required location in the first job to be edited.

The copied page is inserted in the required location, and the page numbers update accordingly.

Copying all the Pages of the Other Job If required, you may copy all pages of the second job and insert them after the pages of the first job.

Note: The red marker indicates where the page will be inserted.

Job Preview & Editor 365

To copy all the pages of the other job:

1. Once the thumbnails of the second job are displayed, click the Merge Jobs button.

All the pages of the second job are inserted at the end of the first job.

366 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

2. Click the Close Job button to view the job to be edited only.

Saving the Edited Job After editing an RTP job, you save the modified job.

To save an edited job:

1. Click the Save As button. The following window appears.

2. Type a new name for the job. Or: Leave the indicated name to overwrite the job.

Job Preview & Editor 367

3. Click OK. The file is saved in the Storage Folder, and the Job Editor window closes.

Previewing and Editing PDL Jobs You may preview a PDL job to closely inspect it before processing.

To preview a PDL job:

1. In the Storage Folder, right-click a PDL job.

2. From the menu, select Job Preview & Editor. The file opens as a PDF in Adobe Acrobat.

3. Modify the file as required.

Note: Jobs edited using Job Editor can not be re-RIPped. Once a job has been saved in the Job Editor, it is a new RTP file without an associated PDL file. For such jobs, parameters requiring re-RIPing can not be applied.

368 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

4. Save the file and exit Adobe Acrobat.

Job Ticket Report The Job Ticket report contains all information from the Job Parameters window (including Job Parameters window title bar data). The Job Ticket report presents the complete job parameters on a single sheet and may be exported or printed as a hard copy.

This feature is useful for:

Updating the Hot-Line service on Job Ticket Report data when a question arises.

Retaining job parameters when the same job is planned to be re- printed in the future.

Providing the client / customer a follow-up tool regarding printed Job Parameter information.

Note: The modified PDL is converted into a PDF that will require re- processing.

Job Ticket Report 369

To display the job ticket report:

1. Right-click a job in the Storage Folder, and from the menu select Job Ticket Report. Or: Select a job in the Storage Folder and from the Job menu, select Job Ticket Report. The Job Ticket Report window appears.

2. You may export or print the report by clicking the Print or Export buttons.

370 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Thumbnail Window The Job Thumbnail window enables you to view a small image representation (thumbnail) of RTP jobs, to help you identify them before printing. It also indicates the jobs title, the file type, the print range, the number of copies you have specified to print the job, the sequential number of the current displayed page, and additional details regarding imposition, paper stock and orientation. This enables you to view some of the job parameters while previewing the job.

After startup, the Job Thumbnail window is displayed.

To close the Job Thumbnail:

Clear the Job Thumbnail selection in the Job menu. Or: Click the Thumbnail button on the Pathways panel.

To open the Thumbnail:

From the Job menu select Job Thumbnail. Or: Click the Thumbnail button on the Pathways panel. The Thumbnail window is displayed.

To use the Job Thumbnail window:

1. While the Job Thumbnail window is open, select an RTP job. The Thumbnail of the job is displayed.

Managing Disk Space 371

If you selected a non-RTP job, the thumbnail view is empty.

2. Use the navigation buttons to move to the first, last, next or previous page. Or: Type the required page number in the page box. The view area updates accordingly.

Managing Disk Space The Printer disk (or Image Disk) holds the processed RTP files of a job.

The User disk (or Spool Disk) holds the submitted PDL files, Hi-Res images, and pre-cached VI elements.

You cannot directly access these disks from within the CXP3535 Color Server, but you may manage them by deleting one or several jobs.

The bottom status bar indicates the Used and Free disk space on both Printer and User disks.

Note: VI jobs only display static job elements.

Note: Do not store files on the desktop. This causes the system disk to fill up and disable the RIP.

372 Chapter 7 Managing Jobs

Whenever the Printer disk reaches a predefined storage capacity threshold, the RIP / Gallop process is temporarily suspended and a system warning message appears. In this case, free disk space as explained below. The RIP process will be resumed automatically as soon as free disk space is available.

To free disk space:

1. Archive jobs.

2. Delete jobs until sufficient disk space is available.

3. Format the Image disks periodically if the drives become fragmented in order to maintain enough space in the image drives.

To format the image disks:

1. Delete all jobs in the CXP3535 Color Server Storage Folder.

2. Exit the CXP3535 Color Server Application.

3. On your Windows desktop, click the Start button and follow the path: CXP3535/CXP3535 Tools/Format Image Disks.

4. Follow the on-screen prompts.

See Archiving and Retrieving Jobs on page 336.

See Deleting Jobs on page 331.

Notes:

1. When a job is deleted, its related PDL files are also deleted.

2. The VI job elements are not deleted with the file, they need to be deleted in the Element Viewer window.

Important: After three days of running and deleting VI jobs, it is recommended to run the three minute Format Image Disks procedure. This process removes any remaining file fragments and deletes all resident jobs in the Storage Folder.

Administering the System

The Administration Window ...........................................................374

General Setup.................................................................................375

Resource Manager ..........................................................................382

Network Setup................................................................................408

Preferences .....................................................................................413

Utilities ...........................................................................................432

374 Chapter 8 Administering the System

The Administration Window The CXP3535 Color Server Administration window contains several utilities that enable you to manage your system.

To open the Administration window:

Click the Admin button on the Pathways panel. Or: From the Tools menu, select Administration. The Administration window appears.

General Setup 375

General Setup The General Setup utility enables you to change the system parameters, such as the hostname of your CXP3535 Color Server, the systems date and time, the user interface language and units of measurement. It also enables you to define whether a test page will be printed every time the CXP3535 Color Server is restarted or powered on.

To open the General Setup utilities:

Open the Administration window and double-click General Setup to expand the folder.

376 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Changing the Server Name 1. In the General Setup folder, double-click Server Name.

The System Properties window appears.

General Setup 377

2. In the Network Identification tab, click the Properties button. The Identification Changes window appears.

3. In the Computer Name box, type a new name for the computer.

4. If you want to change the Workgroup or the Domain in which your computer appears, select the required option and type a new name in the corresponding box.

5. Click OK.

6. Click OK also in the System Properties window. The system prompts you to reboot your computer for the new settings to take effect.

7. Click No if you want to change other system parameters or click Yes and reboot your computer.

Note: Do not change the workgroup or domain unless instructed to.

Important: If you want to change the domain, you will be required to type the password for the domain account. If the password is unavailable, the computer will be locked.

378 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Changing the Date & Time

To change the system date and time:

1. In the General Setup folder, double-click Date & Time. The Date/Time Properties window appears.

2. In the Date & Time tab, select your local time settings.

General Setup 379

3. Select the Time Zone tab and set the correct time zone.

4. Click OK.

Selecting the User Interface Language

To select the user interface language:

1. In the General Setup folder, double-click Language. The Language window appears.

380 Chapter 8 Administering the System

2. Select the interface language you would like to use, and click OK. The system prompts you to reboot your computer for the new settings to take effect.

Setting the Default Unit of Measurement

To set the default unit of measurement:

1. In the General Setup folder, double-click Units. The Units window appears.

2. Select the required system measurement unit and click OK.

General Setup 381

Enable Test Page By default a test page is printed every time the CXP3535 Color Server is restarted or powered on.

To disable test page printing:

1. In the General Setup folder, double-click Enable Test Page. The Enable Test Page dialog box appears.

2. Select No.

3. Click OK.

For further information see Test Page on page 17.

382 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Resource Manager The Resource Manager utility enables you to manage the virtual printers, add and delete fonts, manage the high-res files used for APR, and manage your VI elements. In addition, you can manage ICC profiles and import user defined imposition templates.

To open the Resource Manager utilities:

In the Administration window, double-click Resource Manager to expand the folder.

Virtual Printers A Virtual Printer is a printer published on the network with specific parameters set for processing and printing on the CXP3535 Color Server. The CXP3535 Color Server contains a mechanism that automatically installs the published virtual printers on your client workstation with the PPD and suitable printer driver.

The CXP3535 Color Server is predefined with three virtual printers:

ProcessPrint Files sent to this printer are automatically processed and printed to the printer through the CXP3535 Color Server.

Resource Manager 383

ProcessStore Files sent to this printer are automatically processed and stored in the Storage Folder of the CXP3535 Color Server. You can later submit the jobs to be printed, or change the parameters of a job and resubmit it for processing.

SpoolStore Files sent to this printer are automatically stored in the CXP3535 Color Server's Storage Folder until the print operator submits them for processing and printing.

If a job that is sent from the client, or downloaded to a particular virtual printer, contains preset parameters from the PPD, these options overwrite the parameters set in the virtual printer for that job. The Printer Default options defined in the PPD use the default parameters set for that particular virtual printer.

Adding a new printer When adding a new virtual printer you may specify if this printer is published on the network and if the virtual printer parameters will override the PPD parameters.

To add a new printer:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click Virtual Printers. The Virtual Printers window appears.

2. Click the Add New Virtual Printer button.

384 Chapter 8 Administering the System

The Add New Virtual Printer dialog box appears.

3. In the Printer Name box, type a name for the new printer you want to add.

4. From the Based on list you may select an existing printer with similar settings.

5. In the Comments box, type any comment regarding the virtual printer parameters (optional).

6. The Publish the printer on the network check-box is selected by default. Clear the check-box if you do not want to publish the printer on the network.

7. Select the Override PPD parameters check box if you would like the Virtual Printer settings to override the PPD parameter selection.

8. Edit the Job Parameters of your new virtual printer.

See Editing an Existing Printer on page 385.

Note: If you don't edit the Job Parameters, the settings of the new virtual printer are taken from the printer on which it was based.

Resource Manager 385

9. Click the Save button in the Add New Virtual Printer dialog box. The new printer appears in the Printer list.

Editing an Existing Printer

To edit an existing printer:

1. In the Virtual Printers window, select a printer from the list and click the Edit Virtual Printer button. Or: Right-click one of the existing printers and select Edit Virtual Printer. The Virtual Printer dialog box appears.

2. Click Edit. The Job Parameters window appears.

3. Select the required parameters and change their settings according to your requirements.

4. Click OK to return to the Virtual Printer dialog box.

5. Click Save to save the new settings.

386 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Deleting an Existing Printer

To delete an existing printer:

1. In the Virtual Printers window, select a printer from the list and click the Delete Virtual Printer button. Or: Right-click one of the existing printers and select Delete Virtual Printer. The Delete Logical Printers message appears.

2. Click Yes to delete the designated printer.

Fonts This section lists all the fonts available on the CXP3535 Color Server. It also explains how to manage fonts on the CXP3535 Color Server using the Fonts utility in the Resource Manager. In addition, a step-to-step procedure explains how to use the Fontdownloader driver for downloading fonts from Macintosh client workstations.

Note: Do not delete default printers (ProcessPrint, ProcessStore, SpoolStore).

Resource Manager 387

The following standard fonts are available on the CXP3535 Color Server:

AdobeSansMM AvantGarde-BookOblique BookmanCE-LightItalic

AdobeSerifMM AvantGarde-Demi Carta

AlbertusMT AvantGarde-DemiOblique Chicago

AlbertusMT-Italic AvantGardeCE-Book ChicagoCE

AlbertusMT-Light AvantGardeCE-BookOblique Clarendon

AntiqueOlive-Bold AvantGardeCE-Demi Clarendon-Bold

AntiqueOlive-Compact AvantGardeCE-DemiOblique Clarendon-Light

AntiqueOlive-Italic Bodoni CooperBlack

AntiqueOlive-Roman Bodoni-Bold CooperBlack-Italic

Apple-Chancery Bodoni-BoldItalic Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC

Apple-ChanceryCE Bodoni-Italic Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC

Arial-BoldItalicMT Bodoni-Poster Coronet-Regular

Arial-BoldMT Bodoni-PosterCompressed CoronetCE-Regular

Arial-ItalicMT Bookman-Demi Courier

ArialCE Bookman-DemiItalic Courier-Bold

ArialCE-Bold Bookman-Light Courier-BoldOblique

ArialCE-BoldItalic Bookman-LightItalic Courier-Oblique

ArialCE-Italic BookmanCE-Demi CourierCE

ArialMT BookmanCE-DemiItalic CourierCE-Bold

AvantGarde-Book BookmanCE-Light CourierCE-BoldOblique

388 Chapter 8 Administering the System

CourierCE-Oblique GillSans-BoldCondensed Helvetica-Narrow- BoldOblique

EuroMono-Bold GillSans-BoldItalic Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique

EuroMono-BoldItalic GillSans-Condensed Helvetica-Oblique

EuroMono-Italic GillSans-ExtraBold HelveticaCE

EuroMono-Regular GillSans-Italic HelveticaCE-Bold

EuroSans-Bold GillSans-Light HelveticaCE-BoldOblique

EuroSans-BoldItalic GillSans-LightItalic HelveticaCE-Cond

EuroSans-Italic Goudy HelveticaCE-CondBold

EuroSans-Regular Goudy-Bold HelveticaCE-CondBoldObl

EuroSerif-Bold Goudy-BoldItalic HelveticaCE-CondObl

EuroSerif-BoldItalic Goudy-ExtraBold HelveticaCE-Narrow

EuroSerif-Italic Goudy-Italic HelveticaCE-NarrowBold

EuroSerif-Regular Helvetica HelveticaCE- NarrowBoldOblique

Eurostile Helvetica-Bold HelveticaCE-NarrowOblique

Eurostile-Bold Helvetica-BoldOblique HelveticaCE-Oblique

Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo Helvetica-Condensed HoeflerText-Black

Eurostile-ExtendedTwo Helvetica-Condensed-Bold HoeflerText-BlackItalic

Geneva Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl HoeflerText-Italic

GenevaCE Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique HoeflerText-Ornaments

GillSans Helvetica-Narrow HoeflerText-Regular

GillSans-Bold Helvetica-Narrow-Bold HoeflerTextCE-Black

Resource Manager 389

HoeflerTextCE-BlackItalic NewCenturySchlbk-Italic StempelGaramond-Bold

HoeflerTextCE-Italic NewCenturySchlbk-Roman StempelGaramond-BoldItalic

HoeflerTextCE-Regular NewCenturySchlbkCE-Bold StempelGaramond-Italic

JoannaMT NewCenturySchlbkCE- BoldItalic

StempelGaramond-Roman

JoannaMT-Bold NewCenturySchlbkCE-Italic Symbol

JoannaMT-BoldItalic NewCenturySchlbkCE-Roman Tekton

JoannaMT-Italic NewYork Times-Bold

LetterGothic NewYorkCE Times-BoldItalic

LetterGothic-Bold Optima Times-Italic

LetterGothic-BoldSlanted Optima-Bold Times-Roman

LetterGothic-Slanted Optima-BoldItalic TimesCE-Bold

LubalinGraph-Book Optima-Italic TimesCE-BoldItalic

LubalinGraph-BookOblique Oxford TimesCE-Italic

LubalinGraph-Demi Palatino-Bold TimesCE-Roman

LubalinGraph-DemiOblique Palatino-BoldItalic TimesNewRomanCE

Marigold Palatino-Italic TimesNewRomanCE-Bold

Monaco Palatino-Roman TimesNewRomanCE- BoldItalic

MonacoCE PalatinoCE-Bold TimesNewRomanCE-Italic

MonaLisa-Recut PalatinoCE-BoldItalic TimesNewRomanPS- BoldItalicMT

NewCenturySchlbk-Bold PalatinoCE-Italic TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT

NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic PalatinoCE-Roman TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT

390 Chapter 8 Administering the System

The following standard Kanji fonts are available on the CXP3535 Color Server Japanese version:

TimesNewRomanPSMT Univers-CondensedBold Univers-Oblique

Univers Univers- CondensedBoldOblique

Wingdings-Regular

Univers-Bold Univers-CondensedOblique ZapfChancery-MediumItalic

Univers-BoldExt Univers-Extended ZapfChanceryCE- MediumItalic

Univers-BoldExtObl Univers-ExtendedObl ZapfDingbats

Univers-BoldOblique Univers-Light

Univers-Condensed Univers-LightOblique

FotoMinA101-Bold MidashiMin-MA31 ShinGo - Light

FutoGoB101-Bold MidashiGo-MB31 ShinGo - Medium

GothicBBB - Medium Ryumin-Light ShinGo - Ultra

Jun101-Ligh ShinGo - Bold ShinseiKai - CBSK1

Resource Manager 391

Managing Fonts on the CXP3535 Color Server

To manage fonts on the CXP3535 Color Server:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click Fonts. The Fonts Handler window appears.

2. To set the default font, select a font from the font list, and click the Set As Default button.

3. To delete a font, select the font you want to delete, and click Delete.

4. Click OK.

5. To add new fonts to the CXP3535 Color Server, copy the new font/s to the C:\CXP3535\General\RIP\Font folder.

Using the Fontdownloader Driver The Fontdownloader is a driver provided for Macintosh networks to enable Macintosh clients to download fonts. The Fontdownloader enables you to download fonts to the CXP3535 Color Server. It is not possible to send files through the Fontdownloader, only fonts.

To download fonts using the Fontdownloader driver (Mac OS 8.X- 9.X):

Note: Mac OS 10.X users that want to download fonts need to use a previous Mac OS version (for example, Mac OS 9.X).

392 Chapter 8 Administering the System

1. From the Apple menu, select Chooser.

2. Select AppleShare and browse the network to where the CXP3535 Color Server is configured.

3. Select the CXP3535 Color Server (for example CXP3535) and click OK.

The Login window appears.

4. Log in as Guest and click the Connect button. The corresponding CXP3535 Color Server window appears.

Resource Manager 393

5. Select the Utilities folder and click OK.

6. Double-click the Adobe Downloader 5.0.5 folder.

7. Copy the Adobe Downloader 5.0.5 to your desktop.

Note: Do not select the check box, otherwise it will mount with every reboot.

394 Chapter 8 Administering the System

8. From the Apple menu, select Chooser. The Chooser window appears.

9. Select LaserWriter (8.x) and select the required fontdownloader.

10. Click Create.

11. Double-click the Downloader 5.05 on your desktop.

12. From the File menu select Download Fonts. The following window appears.

13. In the font area select the required font directory.

Resource Manager 395

14. Verify that Disk 0 is the selected device.

15. Add all the required PS fonts and click the Download button. While downloading the following message appears.

At the end of the download, the following message appears.

16. Click OK.

396 Chapter 8 Administering the System

High-Res The High-Res utility enables you to organize your high-resolution files. You can add or delete files, copy files from a local hard disk, from the network, or from an external media (for example, CD-ROM or floppy). The default shared folder dedicated to high-res files resides in D:\Shared\HighRes.

To organize your high-res files:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click Hi-Res. Windows Explorer displays the contents of your High-Res folder.

2. You can add files to the High-Res folder; delete files from it, and copy files from external media.

Resource Manager 397

VI Elements The VI Elements (Variable Information) utility enables you to organize VI elements on your system.

To open the VI elements Viewer window:

In the Resource Manager folder, double-click VI Elements. The Elements Viewer window appears.

Your VI jobs are displayed on the left pane. The right pane lists the elements associated with your jobs, and a thumbnail of a selected element.

To delete VI elements:

Select the elements you want to delete, and click Delete.

398 Chapter 8 Administering the System

To archive your VI elements for future use:

1. Click the Archive button. The Save As window appears.

2. Choose the required archive location for the VI elements, and click Save.

To retrieve VI elements from archive:

1. From the Job menu, select Retrieve from Archive. The Retrieve window appears.

Resource Manager 399

2. Double-click the folder where your VI elements have been archived. Or: Select the folder and click the Open button. The archived VI elements are retrieved.

Profile Manager The Profile Manager utility enables you to manage source and destination ICC profiles of various devices and add them to the CXP3535 Color Server profile manager.

The source ICC profiles are displayed in the Emulation list in the Job Parameters window, in the Color tab, CMYK Workflow parameter.

Managing Device Link Profiles You may import source and destination ICC profiles and map ICC profiles to specific paper colors. You may also delete profiles.

Note: The archived job name is replaced by the original job name when the job is retrieved.

To choose the transformation method (CSA or Device Link), see Color - Emulations on page 416.

400 Chapter 8 Administering the System

To import a source ICC profile using the device link method:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click Profile Manager. The Profile Manager window appears.

The Source ICC Profile tab appears first, and the predefined source ICC profiles are displayed.

2. Click the Import button. The Import Source ICC Profile dialog box appears.

3. In the Source profile area, click the browse button, browse to the required source profile, select it and click Open. The new emulation name is displayed in the Emulation name box; if you would like to change the name you may do so.

4. Click the Import button.

5. Click Close in the Profile Manager window. The new source ICC profile is added to the Emulation (Device Link) list in the Job Parameters window, in the CMYK Workflow parameter.

Resource Manager 401

To import a destination ICC profile using the device link method:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click Profile Manager. The Profile Manager window appears.

2. Select the Destination ICC Profile tab. The predefined ICC profiles are displayed.

3. Click the Import button. The Import Destination ICC Profile window appears.

4. In the Destination profile area, click the browse button. Then, browse and select the required source profile, and click Open. The new emulation name is displayed in the Emulation name box; if you would like to change the name you may do so.

5. Click the Import button.

6. Click Close in the Profile Manager window.

402 Chapter 8 Administering the System

7. Click Close in the Profile Manager window. The new destination ICC profile is added to the Destination ICC Profile list.

To delete an ICC Profile using the device link method:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click Profile Manager. The Profile Manager window appears.

2. Select the profile you would like to delete.

3. Click the Delete button. The following message appears.

4. Click Yes. The profile is deleted from the ICC Profile list.

Note: You cannot delete predefined ICC profiles.

Resource Manager 403

5. Click Close in the Profile Manager window.

Managing CSA Emulation Profiles You may import, rename and delete CSA Emulation profiles.

To import a source ICC profile using the CSA Emulation method:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click Profile Manager. The Profile Manager window appears.

2. Click the Import button. The Import CSA Emulation window appears.

3. In the Source profile area, click the browse button. Then, browse and select the required source profile. Click Open. The new emulation name is displayed in the Emulation name box; if you would like to change the name you may do so.

4. Click the Import button. Click Close in the Profile Manager window. The new CSA Emulation is added to the Emulation (CSA) list, in the Job Parameters window, in the CMYK Workflow parameter.

404 Chapter 8 Administering the System

To rename a CSA ICC profile:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click Profile Manager. The Profile Manager window appears.

2. Select the ICC Profile you would like to rename.

3. Click the Rename button. The Rename dialog box appears.

4. Type in a new name for the ICC Profile, and click OK. The profile with the new name is listed in the Emulation list, in the Job Parameters window, in the CMYK Workflow parameter.

5. Click Close in the Profile Manager window.

Note: You cannot rename predefined ICC profiles.

Resource Manager 405

To delete an ICC Profile using the CSA Emulation method:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click Profile Manager. The Profile Manager window appears.

2. Select the profile you would like to delete.

3. Click the Delete button. The following message appears.

4. Click Yes. The profile is deleted from the profile list.

5. Click Close in the Profile Manager window.

Note: You cannot delete predefined ICC profiles.

406 Chapter 8 Administering the System

User Defined Imposition Template The User Defined Imposition Template utility enables you to import and manage, user defined imposition templates (created in a stand-alone application such as Ultimate Software) in the CXP3535 Color Server.

Importing User Defined Imposition Templates

To import a user defined imposition template:

1. In the Resource Manager folder, double-click User Defined Imposition Template. The Template Manager window appears.

2. Click the Import Template button. The Import Template window appears.

Resource Manager 407

3. Browse to the location of the user defined template and click the Import button.

4. Select the lock job ticket check box if you would like the template to be locked so that no imposition parameters may be applied (in the Job Parameters window).

5. Repeat the above procedure to add additional user defined imposition templates.

Renaming a User Defined Imposition Template

To rename an existing user defined imposition template:

1. In the Template Manager window, select a user defined imposition template from the list and click the Rename button. Or: Right-click a user defined imposition template you want to rename and from the menu select Rename. The user defined imposition template name becomes active.

2. Type a new name for the user defined imposition template.

3. Click outside the name box of the user defined template. The user defined imposition template with the new name is listed in the user defined imposition template list.

Deleting a User Defined Imposition Template

To delete an existing user defined imposition template:

In the Template Manager window, select a user defined imposition template from the list and click the Delete button. Or: Right-click a user defined imposition template you want to delete and from the menu select Delete. The selected user defined imposition template is deleted.

408 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Network Setup The Network Setup utility enables you to change settings in the IPX, TCP/ IP and Apple Talk.

To open the Network Setup utilities:

In the Administration window, double-click Network Setup to expand the folder.

Note: Before changing the network settings, consult your System Administrator.

Network Setup 409

IPX Printing IPX Printing enables the CXP3535 Color Server to act as a job server for the Novell queue. A job server checks each assigned queue at a specified interval, taking care of jobs on a first-in, first-out basis. Once a job is processed, its associated file is deleted from the queue directory.

To setup the CXP3535 Color Server IPX parameter:

1. In the Network Setup folder, double click IPX Printing. The IPX Printing dialog box appears.

2. Type the exact Tree parameter and the full containers path of the Context parameter, in their respective boxes. You may also click the Browse button and browse to the required Tree and Path.

3. Click the Properties button.

410 Chapter 8 Administering the System

The Local Area Connection Properties window appears, followed by the NWLink IPX/SPX Properties window.

4. To change the frame type, select a frame type from the Frame type list, then click OK.

5. Click OK also in the Local Area Connection Properties window. You are prompted to restart your computer.

6. Click No if you need to make more changes, or Yes to reboot.

Note: Using this procedure requires further setup by the network administrator. See Novell NDS Setup and Configuration on page 99.

Network Setup 411

TCP/IP Setup The CXP3535 Color Server is predefined with a default IP address. The TCP/IP option enables you to change this IP address and other TCP/IP settings.

To change the TCP/IP network settings:

1. In the Network Setup folder, double-click TCP/IP Setup. The Local Area Connection Properties window appears, followed by the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.

2. Change the IP Address by selecting Obtain an IP address automatically or select Use the following IP address and type the required address.

3. Click OK.

Note: Before changing the network settings, consult your System Administrator.

412 Chapter 8 Administering the System

4. Click OK also in the Local Area Connection Properties window. You are prompted to restart your computer.

5. Click No if you need to make more changes, or Yes to reboot.

AppleTalk Setup The AppleTalk Setup utility enables you to change the AppleTalk zone in which your CXP3535 Color Server is located.

To change the AppleTalk network settings:

1. In the Network Setup folder, double-click AppleTalk Setup. The AppleTalk Protocol Properties window appears.

2. From the zone list, select the AppleTalk zone for your computer, and click OK.

Preferences 413

Preferences The Preferences utility enables you to change several settings such as the log file generated by the Accounting and Message Viewer applications and the System disks threshold. You may define the appearance of alert messages and pre-RIP preview and set the default archiving path and default paper size.

You may also specify your color preferences, enable / disable OPI, set PDF optimization and also set the remote tools connection options and print queue manager settings. You can also control the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer ATS options.

To open the Preferences utilities:

In the Administration window, double-click Preferences to expand the folder.

414 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Color - Spire Spot Color Dictionary By default the Spire Spot Color Dictionary is applied, which means that spot colors are printed using the custom (or pre-defined) values that appear in the spot dictionary. You may also disable the usage of the Spot Color Dictionary and print spot colors using the default CMYK values that each spot is delivered with.

To disable the application of the Spot Color Editor:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click Color to expand the folder, then double-click Spire Spot Color Dictionary. The Spot Color Dictionary window appears.

2. Select Do not use Spire dictionary.

3. Click OK.

Preferences 415

Color - Calibration Methods There are two calibration methods:

Target Calibration This calibration method enables you to calibrate the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer according to the following fixed density values:

Cyan 1.6d

Magenta 1.597

Yellow 1.017

Black 1.8

These density values specify the maximal density value that will be achieved by the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer. The purpose of this color calibration method is to ensure that the same color quality is achieved for each Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer in use day after day.

Auto Adjusted Calibration This calibration method enables you to calibrate the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer according to a fixed percentage of the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer maximal density. This is an automatic calibration method which is adjusted to the printers current state.

To specify the calibration method:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click Color to expand the folder, then double-click Calibration Methods. The Calibration Methods window appears.

2. Select the required calibration method, Target calibration or Auto Adjusted Calibration.

416 Chapter 8 Administering the System

3. If you selected Auto Adjusted Calibration and you would like to change the default settings, click the Advanced button. The Auto Adjusted Calibration window appears.

Change the Percent of Printer Max Setup density if required, by moving the slider, or by typing a percentage value in the corresponding box. Then click Apply.

4. Click OK in the Calibration Methods window.

Color - Emulations Using this utility, you may select the required emulation method:

Device Link (default)

CSA

In addition, you may specify to emulate RGB elements (in addition to the CMYK emulations) and to preserve pure CMYK colors (colors that are 100% Magenta / Cyan / Yellow / Black).

Note: The default percentage value is 85%.

Important: Changes to the calibration method during RIP will not take effect.

Note: The emulation profiles that are displayed in the Job Parameters window are related to the chosen emulation method.

Preferences 417

To specify the emulation method:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click Color to expand the folder, then double-click Emulations. The Emulations window appears.

2. Select the required emulation method from the list.

3. If you selected Device Link as your emulation method:

The Preserve pure colors check box is selected by default. For pure CMYK colors to be emulated (and not preserved) clear the check box.

The Emulate RGB Elements check box is selected by default, so that RGB colors are emulated according to the selected CMYK emulation method. If you do not want RGB elements to be emulated, clear the check box.

4. Click OK.

Note: If you selected CSA as your emulation method, these check boxes are disabled.

418 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Accounting/Message Viewer Log Setup By default, all the jobs that were handled during the past 90 days are listed in the CXP3535 Color Server Accounting window, and all the jobs that were handled during the past 90 days are listed in the CXP3535 Color Server Message Viewer. This utility enables you to specify different values for how long information remains before being overwritten.

To setup the accounting/message viewer:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click Accounting/Message Viewer Log Setup. The Accounting/Message Viewer Log Setup window appears.

2. In the Accounting Log Setup area, and in the Message Viewer Log Setup areas, type the required values.

3. To remove all the existing information from the windows, whenever desired, click the Clear Log Now button.

4. Click OK to confirm the changes you made.

Note: For additional details, refer to Job Accounting on page 439.

Preferences 419

System Disks When the Printer or User Disks reach a pre-defined threshold (default is 250 MB), RIP is suspended and the system provides a warning message. The RIP will resume automatically only after disk space is available.

To set the system disks threshold:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click System Disks. The System Disks window appears.

2. Set the minimum free disk space required for RIP.

3. Click OK.

Alert Messages The Alert Messages utility enables you to select whether the Alerts window will open automatically, or not, when an error occurs. By default it is set to Launch Alerts window automatically on new error.

To set the alert window settings:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click Alert Messages. The Alert Messages window appears.

420 Chapter 8 Administering the System

2. If you would like the Alerts window to appear whenever an error occurs, keep the default Launch Alerts window automatically on new error. If you would like to open the Alerts window upon selection only, select Launch Alerts window on user selection only.

3. Click OK to confirm your choice.

Pre-RIP Preview

To define the Pre-RIP preview:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click Pre-RIP Preview. The Pre-RIP Preview window appears.

2. In the PS Preview area, specify your choice:

If you would like to save the file as PDF - select the first choice.

If you would like to return to the original PS file, select the second option.

3. In the VI Job Preview area, select the required number of booklets for pre-RIP preview.

Preferences 421

Default Archiving Path The Default Archiving Path utility enables you to select a default path for archiving jobs. Once the path is set, and Archive is selected from the job menu, the archive window browser will be directed to the predefined path.

To define the default archiving path:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click Default Archiving Path. The Archiving Path window appears.

2. Click the Browse button. The Browse window appears.

3. Browse to the required archiving location for your job (s) and click Select.

422 Chapter 8 Administering the System

PDF Optimization The PDF Optimization utility optimizes the RIP process of PDF files with repeated elements (which are marked as repeated in the PDF file) and consequently decreases the processing time significantly.

To enable PDF Optimization:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click PDF Optimization. The PDF Optimization window appears.

2. Select Enable PDF Optimization if you would like to optimize the RIP of PDF files.

3. Click OK.

OPI OPI (Open Prepress Interface) is a standardized set of file instructions that specify how an external high-resolution image is placed in a PostScript file as it goes to RIP. These instructions specify the type, size, position, rotation, cropping and location of the high-resolution images.

PDL files from some DTP applications (such as QuarkXPress) may contain these instructions (comments) by default, although the high resolution files are unavailable and have been embedded in the job. In this case, the job will not be processed and an error message will appear.

Therefore, the CXP3535 Color Server OPI image replacement is disabled by default, in order to ensure continuous printing. If you would like to enable the OPI support, follow the next procedure.

Preferences 423

To enable the Spire OPI support:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click OPI. The OPI window appears.

2. Select Enable OPI Spire Support.

3. Click OK.

Default Paper Size When a PDL file does not contain any page size information (usually set by the PPD), the RIP uses a pre-defined default size. This default size is defined according to the unit of measurement you have selected during the first time configuration. If your choice was millimeters your default size is A3. If your choice was inches your default size is Tabloid.

You may change the default paper size, and provide better control of the default RIP size.

Note: When OPI is enabled, the Support Helios Server is selected by default. If you do not want Helios server support, clear the check box.

424 Chapter 8 Administering the System

To set the default paper size:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click Default Paper Size. The Default Paper Size window appears.

2. From the Size list, select the required page size, then click OK. The following message appears.

3. Click OK.

Preferences 425

Print Queue Manager The Print Queue Manager enables you to define the In Print queue policies. You may select a job batching policy, and a held (frozen) job policy.

To set the In Print queue policies:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click Print Queue Manager. The Print Queue Managerwindow appears.

2. In the Job Batching Policy area, select Enable Job Batching to print jobs with the same page parameters, one after the other without the cycle down.

Or: Select Disable Job Batching to disable the printing of jobs with the same page orientation, one after the other, and enable cycle down.

3. In the Held Jobs Policy area, select Bypass held jobs, to bypass frozen jobs in the In Print queue. Or:

Note: The Job Batching utility enables you to print several jobs in a batch, one after the other without the cycle down, and consequently save production time.

For further details, see Job Batching Workflow on page 326.

426 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Select Dont Bypass held jobs to stop the printing from the queue when a job is assigned a frozen status. The following message appears below the Held Jobs Policy area.

4. Click OK.

Remote Tools Setup The Remote Tools Setup includes setup for the Remote Admin tool and enables the connection of clients to the CXP3535 Color Server over the network using the Spire Web Center.

Remote Admin The Remote Admin utility enables the system administrator to connect, view, operate and perform administration actions on the CXP3535 Color Server from his client workstation. While this remote connection and operation takes place, the regular operation of the CXP3535 Color Server is not affected. In fact, the only indication the spire operator has that such connection takes place, is in the DFE and Printer Animation and in DFE Monitor window.

Preferences 427

Following is a graphic of the DFE and Printer Animation as it is presented when the remote session is active.

In order to secure the remote connection, a password should be assigned by the system administrator.

The remote admin setup process includes the following stages:

1. On the CXP3535 Color Server: The remote admin service is enabled and a password is assigned.

2. On the System Administrator: The client program is downloaded and launched.

Note: This tool is designed for the exclusive usage of the System Administrator. Clients who would like to connect to the CXP3535 Color Server from their workstations may do so by using the Spire Web Center which enables you to view and monitor your jobs in the CXP3535 Color Server queues.

For further details, see Spire Web Center on page 240.

428 Chapter 8 Administering the System

To enable the remote admin service and set a password:

1. On the CXP3535 Color Server, in the Preferences folder, double-click Remote Admin. The Remote Tools Setup window appears.

2. From the Remote Admin Setup area, select Enable Remote Admin Service.

3. In the Password box, type a password.

4. Click OK.

To download and launch the Remote Admin Client application:

1. From the System Administrator workstation, connect to the required CXP3535 Color Server, and from the Utilities folder (related to your computer type, PC or Macintosh) double-click RemoteAdminClient.exe.

Note: This password will be used later on to connect to the Remote Admin application from the System Administrator workstation.

Tip: You may also download the application from the Spire Web Center under Downloads.

Preferences 429

When the instillation is complete, the Login window appears.

2. From the Spire Server list, select the required CXP3535 Color Server.

3. Click OK. The next Login window appears.

4. In the Session password box, type the password you have previously created in the Remote Tools Setup window.

5. Click OK. The CXP3535 Color Server workspace appears on your screen.

6. You may now perform any required action.

430 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Web Connect Setup The Web Connect Setup enables clients to connect to the CXP3535 Color Server over the network by using the Spire Web Center. This possibility is disabled by default.

To enable web connections:

1. On the CXP3535 Color Server,in the Preferences folder, double-click Remote Tools Setup. The Remote Tools Setup window appears.

2. From the Web Connect Setup area, select Allow web connections.

3. Click OK.

For further details, see Spire Web Center on page 240.

Preferences 431

ATS The ATS utility enables to control the automatic tray switching feature in the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer. This feature enables to automatically switch to a different paper tray (containing the same paper size) once the selected tray runs out of paper.

To set the auto tray switching options:

1. In the Preferences folder, double-click ATS. The ATSwindow appears.

2. To enable auto tray switching select the Enable auto tray switching (ATS) check box.

3. Select the required trays that will be included in the switch path.

4. Click OK.

5. Restart the CXP3535 Color Server.

Note: The order of the tray switching is determined according to the Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer feeders configuration.

432 Chapter 8 Administering the System

Utilities The Utilities folder enables you to back up (and view) the configuration of your CXP3535 Color Server.

To open the system Utilities:

In the Administration window, double-click Utilities to expand the folder.

View Configuration The View Configuration utility enables you to view the configuration of your CXP3535 Color Server and to print it to any printer on the network connected to your CXP3535 Color Server. In addition you may save the configuration in the network or export it to an external media.

Utilities 433

To view the configuration:

1. In the Utilities folder, double-click View Configuration. The View Configuration window appears.

2. Click Print to print the configuration. The Print window appears.

3. From the Printer list, select one of the defined printers and click OK.

434 Chapter 8 Administering the System

4. If you would like to save the configuration click the Export button. The Save As window appears.

5. Browse to the required location and click the Save button.

6. Click Close to close the View Configuration window.

Utilities 435

Configuration Backup and Restore The Configuration Backup utility enables you to backup your CXP3535 Color Server configuration to a local hard disk, to a network drive or to an external media (such as a CD-ROM drive), connected to the CXP3535 Color Server.

Configuration Backup

To backup the configuration of your CXP3535 Color Server:

1. In the Utilities folder, double-click Configuration Backup. The Configuration Backup window appears.

2. In the Backup Configuration to area, the default location for the backup configuration (C:/CXP3535/General/Configuration) appears. If you would like to specify a different path, click the Browse button and browse to a different directory path for the backup.

Note: You may also backup to an external media.

436 Chapter 8 Administering the System

3. Click the Start Backup button.

4. When the back up process is complete, the following message appears.

5. Click OK.

Configuration Restore

To restore the configuration of your CXP3535 Color Server:

1. In the Restore Configuration from area, the default configuration location is displayed.(C:/CXP3535/General/Configuration). If you would like to select a different path, click the Browse button and browse to a different directory path for the restore.

2. Click Start Recovery.

Note: The last path will be saved and displayed to the path box. If the backup was made to an external media, the displayed path will be the default: C:/CXP3535/General/Configuration.

Note: The configuration files name will always be: "SpireConf.Cab" (Cabinet file.) You may also restore the configuration from an external media.

Utilities 437

The Restore Configuration window appears.

3. By default, all categories are selected. If you do not want to restore certain categories, clear the selections.

4. Click OK. The following message appears.

5. Click Yes if you would like the restored files to replace the current ones. Click No if you do not want the restored files to replace the existing files.

6. When the process is complete, click OK to close the Configuration Backup window.

Note: When restoring the configuration, all the custom tables/sets are added to the system. This includes imported user-defined imposition templates, new virtual printers, downloaded fonts etc.

Note: The Restore Configuration date is updated in the Configuration Backup window.

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Job Accounting

Job Accounting Overview................................................................440

Managing the Accounting Information ...........................................442

Accounting / Message Viewer Log Setup.........................................446

Exporting the Accounting Report ....................................................446

Printing the Accounting Report .......................................................447

440 Chapter 9 Job Accounting

Job Accounting Overview To enable billing, the Accounting feature offers information related to all the jobs that printed successfully via the CXP3535 Color Server as a tab delimited file. If required, you may filter, sort or print the list, or export the report into a spreadsheet application (for example, Microsoft Excel), where you can manipulate the data as required.

Viewing the Accounting Information

To view the accounting information:

At any stage of work, from the Tools menu select Accounting. The Account Viewer window appears, listing information related to all the jobs that printed successfully via the CXP3535 Color Server.

Job Accounting Overview 441

Each row in the Accounting report contains information related to a specific job.

The columns indicate the following information.

Note: To see additional columns, use the horizontal scroll bar. By default, all the jobs that were handled during the past 3 months are listed. In the Administration window, under Preferences, you may specify how long information remains before being overwritten. In addition, you may remove all the information from the window whenever required.

Job Title The original name of the file related to this job (that is, without the extension).

Sender The user name of the system from which this job originated.

Submitted The date and time the job was first submitted into the CXP3535 Color Server.

Started Printing The date and time on which the job first started printing.

Processing Time The total time during which the job was processed.

Printing Time The total time during which the job was printed.

Job Size The job size in MB.

Paper Size The size of the media set for the job (for example, Letter, A3, A4).

Paper Weight The paper weight in gs/m.

Coating The paper stock coating status (Coated or Uncoated).

Sets The actual number of printed copies.

Job B/W Pages The number of black-and-white pages in the original PDL file.

Job Color Pages The number of color pages in the original PDL file.

Total Pages Printed

The number of pages that were printed.

Purged B/W The number of B/W pages that were already in the paper path, and were cleared due to job abort, or paper jam.

Purged Color The number of color pages that were already in the paper path, and were cleared due to job abort, or paper jam.

442 Chapter 9 Job Accounting

Managing the Accounting Information

Reordering Columns If required, you may change the current order of the columns. The following figure shows the default order (that is, Sender followed by Submitted).

To reorder the columns:

Click the cursor on a column (for example, Sender) and, without releasing the mouse button, drag the column to the required location (for example, to place the Sender column after the Submitted column).

Page Exceptions The existence of exceptions in the job (Yes/ No).

Account [optional] A string of text, if such was entered in Job Parameters.

Recipient [optional] A string of text, if such was entered in Job Parameters.

Job Comments [optional] A string of text, if such was entered in Job Parameters.

Managing the Accounting Information 443

Resizing Columns If required, you may resize columns (or even minimize columns to hide them altogether).

To resize columns:

1. Click the cursor on the right border of the required column (for example, Submitted). The cursor switches shape.

2. Drag the cursor to the right to enlarge the size of the column, or to the left to decrease (or to minimize the column to hide it altogether. To retrieve the column, drag the cursor to the right). The following figure shows the list after hiding the Submitted column.

3. To re-display a hidden column, place the cursor on the location of its original left border and drag to the right until the full column is re- displayed.

444 Chapter 9 Job Accounting

Filtering the Information by Date By default, the information that was gathered in the past three months is displayed. You may filter the list to show all the information gathered, or only information that was gathered within specific dates.

To filter the list:

1. In the Accounting Viewer window, select the From option.

2. Click the arrow to the right of the From or To date box.

3. Select the required date from the calendar that appears. The list updates accordingly.

Managing the Accounting Information 445

Sorting the Information By default, the list is sorted by the date the jobs were submitted (the latest dates appear first).

You may reverse the order or sort the information in the report by another information column.

To sort using a different column:

1. Click another column header (for example, Sender) to sort the list by that column (in ascending order).

2. Click the column header again to sort by descending order.

Note: Depending on the type of information, the sorting is alphabetical or numerical.

446 Chapter 9 Job Accounting

Accounting / Message Viewer Log Setup By default, all the jobs that were handled during the past 90 days are listed in the CXP3535 Color Server Accounting window. Also, all jobs that were handled during the past 56 days are listed in the CXP3535 Color Server Message Viewer. You may specify how long information remains before being overwritten.

Exporting the Accounting Report You may save the Accounting information to an ASCII Tab delimited file.

To export the accounting information:

1. Filter the information as required.

2. Click the Export button. The Export Accounting window appears.

3. Browse to the location in which to save the report.

To change the Accounting / Message Viewer log setup, see Accounting/Message Viewer Log Setup on page 418.

Printing the Accounting Report 447

4. Click OK. The report is saved as a Tab delimited text file in the specified location.

5. If required, open the *.txt file in a text editor or in a spreadsheet application (for example, Microsoft Excel) and manipulate the data.

Printing the Accounting Report You may print the Accounting information (filtered and sorted) to any connected printer.

To print the accounting report:

1. Filter and sort the report as required.

Note: The report includes all the columns (even those that were hidden), listed in the original order and sorting. To export specific rows, select them before clicking Export. The exported report will include only these rows. The exported data is not deleted from the Accounting report on the CXP3535 Color Server (that is, it will still be displayed in the Job Accounting window).

Note: To print specific rows, select the required rows now. The printed report will include only these rows.

448 Chapter 9 Job Accounting

2. Click the Print List button. The Print window appears.

3. From the Printer Name list, select the required printer.

4. Set the printing options as required and click OK. The data is printed according to the current filtering and sorting.

Note: To fit as many columns as possible onto the page, print using Landscape orientation (if your printer supports it). The report includes all the columns (including those that were hidden), listed in the original order.

System Messages

Overview ........................................................................................450

The Alerts Window .........................................................................450

Job History......................................................................................452

The Message Viewer .......................................................................454

Managing Messages .......................................................................455

Pop-up Messages............................................................................458

450 Chapter 10 System Messages

Overview While jobs are being handled by the CXP3535 Color Server, various messages are emitted. You may view the messages of each job in the Job History window, of the entire session in the Message Viewer window, or just the error messages within the Alerts window.

The Alerts Window Any time the system emits an Error type message, the Alerts window appears, listing all the error messages that were generated during the workflow (the total number of messages is also indicated).

From the Tools menu, select Alerts. Or: Click the Alerts button on the Pathways panel. The Alerts window appears, listing all the Error messages that were generated during the workflow.

You may specify whether you would like the Alert window to launch automatically on a new error, or upon user selection only. To set the preferred option, see Alert Messages on page 419.

Note: By default, the list is sorted to show new messages at the top of the list. For each message, the origin of the message is indicated, and a task that will solve the problem is suggested.

The Alerts Window 451

To delete messages from the Alerts window:

1. Select the irrelevant message(s) and click the Clear button. Or: Click the Clear All button to remove all messages.

2. Click the Close buttonto close the Alerts window.

System Disks Threshold Message When the Printer or User Disks reach a pre-defined threshold (usually of 256 MB), RIP is suspended and the system provides a warning message. The RIP resumes automatically only after disk space is available. In this case, you may increase the System Disk threshold.

Note: Cleared messages are not removed from the Message Viewer or related Job History windows.

For further details on setting the system disks threshold see System Disks on page 419.

452 Chapter 10 System Messages

Job History

To view the job history:

Right-click a job in the Queue Manager or in the Storage Folder, and from the menu select Job History. Or: Select a job and from the Job menu select Job History. The Job History window appears, listing all the messages that were generated during the workflow of the selected job. The Job History window indicates the job title and the sender name (the user name of the system from which the job originated).

Job History 453

Message Information For each message, the following information is indicated by default:

An icon denoting the type of message (Error, Warning, or Information)

The date and time on which the message was emitted (the time stamp)

The stage in the workflow (for example, Print or Process)

The message text

You may filter the messages by type, and/or sort the list by one of the column headers.

454 Chapter 10 System Messages

The Message Viewer

To open the Message Viewer:

At any stage of work, from the Tools menu, select Message Viewer. The Message Viewer window appears, listing all the messages that were generated during the workflow.

By default, all the jobs that were handled during the last 3 months (90 days) are listed.

To view messages related to a specific job, see Job History on page 452.

The default may be changed in the Administration window under Preferences. For further details see Accounting/Message Viewer Log Setup on page 418.

Managing Messages 455

Managing Messages You may filter the messages by type, and / or sort the list by one of the column headers. In addition, you may print the list of messages.

If required, you may reorder and resize columns, filter the list or sort the list by one of its column headers.

Reordering Columns If required, you may change the current order of the columns.

To change the order of the columns:

Click the cursor on a column (for example, Stage) and without releasing the mouse button, drag the column to the left or to the right to the required location (for example, place the Stage column after the Date/Time column).

Resizing Columns If required, you may resize columns (or even minimize columns so they are not viewed at all).

To change the size of the columns:

1. Click the cursor on the right border of the required column (for example, Sender). The cursor switches shape.

2. Drag the cursor to the right to enlarge the size of the column, or to the left to decrease (or to minimize the column so it will not be viewed at all).

3. To bring the column back into view, drag the cursor to the right.

Note: This section is relevant for the Message Viewer and Job History windows (but not for the Alerts window). These settings are retained after closing a window.

456 Chapter 10 System Messages

Filtering the Messages by Type Each message in the Message Viewer and Job History windows is assigned one of the following types / icon.

By default, all message types are listed in the Message Viewer (check marks appear next to the icons).

You may filter the list in order to view only messages of certain types. Click any message type button (for example, Error) to remove the check mark, in order not to list such messages.

The list updates accordingly (in the example below, Error messages are not listed).

Note: The check mark emphasizes that messages of this type, appear in the list. If all the buttons are cleared from default selection, no messages are listed.

Managing Messages 457

Sorting the Message List By default, the list is sorted by the date at which the messages were created (in descending order).

To sort the list by one of its column headers:

1. Click the required header once.

2. Click again to switch the order.

Printing the Message List You may print the information as it is presented in the Message Viewer (as it is currently filtered and sorted).

To print the message list:

1. Filter and sort the list as required (the data is printed according to the current filtering and sorting).

2. Click the Print List button. The Print window is displayed.

458 Chapter 10 System Messages

3. Set the printing options as required and click OK.

Pop-up Messages Pop-up messages appear during normal operations with the CXP3535 Color Server. These messages may appear to confirm an action (for example, upon changing an imposition method), warn of a lack of printer resources (for example, if a specific paper stock is missing), or warn of a possible problem with a procedure.

The following are examples of pop-up messages.

When a pop-up message appears:

1. Read the pop-up message.

2. Take action as requested by the pop-up message (for example, confirm a procedure or replace printer resources).

3. Continue with normal CXP3535 Color Server operations.

Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Overview ........................................................................................460

Reinstalling the Operating System ...................................................462

Reinstalling the Creo Application.....................................................464

The Configuration Wizard (If configuration backup is available).......468

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable)............476

460 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Overview This chapter describes the two methods of reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server software by complete overwrite or by system partition. It describes how to install the Windows 2000 Professional operating system, the Creo Software Application, and to configure the system using the Configuration Wizard.

The CXP3535 Color Server is delivered to the customer site preloaded with the following software and configuration:

Windows 2000 Professional

MS Service Pack 3.0

Internet Explorer 6.0

CXP3535 Color Server Software Application version 1.0 for the DocuColor 3535

Adobe Acrobat 5.0

Ultimate InSpire Software

Network Parameters (hostname, IP address, network services and protocols)

It may, however, become necessary, for example after a system crash, to reinstall the system at the customers site.

The reinstallation is mostly unattended. User interaction is needed only for entering the OS license number and the computer hostname, for rebooting the computer when requested, for inserting the final application CD-ROM and for the Configuration Wizard. The reinstallation of the system requires two CD-ROMs: CD-ROM #1 (Windows 2000 Professional Fast Install) and CD-ROM #2 (CXP3535 Color Server version 1.0 for the DocuColor 3535 Application Software).

Notes:

1. System Partition Overwrite should be performed when the Windows 2000 Professional operating system is corrupt and needs to be reinstalled.

2. Complete Overwrite should be performed only when installing a new system.

Overview 461

The following table outlines the CXP3535 Color Server disk configuration:

There are two methods of reinstalling the system:

Creo Software Complete Overwrite Installation: This procedure replaces the entire system disk, operating system partition, Creo application, and user partition (partitions C: and D:). A complete overwrite should be performed only when you are upgrading the operating system.

Creo Software Preservation Installation (System Partition Overwrite): This procedure replaces only the operating system (partition C:). You should perform System Partition Overwrite when the Windows 2000 Professional operating system is corrupt and needs to be reinstalled.

Disk 0 Image storage

Disk 1 C: Windows 2000 Professional software Creo application

D: Spool files Shared files Output directory files APR high res files SpireFtp folder SpireOnWeb folder

Note: To enable the restoration of customer settings, back up the CXP3535 Color Server configuration, before loading the operating system. It is recommended that you back up your configuration to an external device in case the system crashes. Determine whether VIPP or any other Xerox/Creo supported application is loaded on the CXP3535 Color Server. Such applications have to be reloaded after the reinstallation is completed.

Note: This option deletes all the files stored on partitions C: and D:. Make sure to back up any important customer files before selecting this option.

462 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Reinstalling the Operating System Before reinstalling ensure that:

the DocuColor 3535 printer is switched off. You will be instructed, at a later stage, when to switch the printer on.

The following information is available:

CD-ROM software pack

Computer name (for example CXP3535_1)

TCP/IP information

Windows 2000 Professional OEM product ID number

Gateway, WINS address, and DNS information

Required AppleTalk zone

IPX information

To reinstall the Windows 2000 Professional operating system:

1. Power on your computer.

2. Place CD-ROM #1 (Windows 2000 Fast Install) in the CD-ROM drive.

3. Wait until the PC DOS Start Up Menu appears. The following choices are available:

Creo Software Complete Overwrite Installation

Creo Software Preservation Installation (System Partition Overwrite)

DOS prompt

For more details, refer to the Xerox Installation and Planning Guide.

Note: If you are already logged on your system and the CXP3535 Color Server workspace is open, exit the workspace and proceed to step 2.

Reinstalling the Operating System 463

4. Use the arrows to select Creo Software Complete Overwrite Installation and press ENTER.

The system starts copying the files. After a few minutes, you are prompted to remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive and reboot.

5. Press CTRL+ALT+DEL to reboot. The system copies files and reboots.

6. When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup screen appears type the 25-digit Product Key, that comes with the Windows 2000 Professional manual, and click Next.

7. In the Computer Name and Administrator Password screen, type the name for the CXP3535 Color Server, for example CXP3535_1.

8. Click Next. The installation process begins.

9. At the end of the installation, the system reboots a number of times. You are asked to insert the Application Software CD-ROM. Insert CD-ROM #2 into the CD-ROM drive.

10. Proceed to Reinstalling the Creo Application on page 464.

Note: If the Norton Ghost License Agreement Warning appears, select OK to mark the drives as usable by Norton Ghost. The warning will only appear if you have installed a new hard disk.

Important: In the administrator name and password area, use the default settings. If required, you can change the operator name and password, but only at the end of the installation process (see Changing the Operator Name and Password on page 491).

464 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Reinstalling the Creo Application

To reinstall the Creo application:

1. After inserting the Application Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive, close the CD-ROM Drive.

2. In the SPIRE splash screen, click Start. The Adobe Acrobat setup begins. After the Adobe Acrobat setup is complete, the CXP3535 Color Server installation starts and the following window appears.

3. Click Yes. The system restarts automatically.

Note: Wait for the LED on the CD-ROM drive to stop blinking before proceeding.

Reinstalling the Creo Application 465

The following Spire Application screen and VBScript message appear.

4. Remove CD-ROM #2 from the CD-ROM drive.

5. In the VBScript message, click OK.

466 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Once the formatting is complete, the Spire workspace appears.

Reinstalling the Creo Application 467

6. Switch the DocuColor 3535 printer on. The CXP3535 Color Server automatically submits a test page file, the DocuColor 3535 printer prints the page, and the Configuration Wizard window, similar to the following illustration, appears.

7. You have completed Reinstalling the Creo Application, proceed to the next step (step 8).

8. Once the Configuration Wizard appears, you are required to choose one of two possible reinstall options.

If configuration recovery information is available, proceed to The Configuration Wizard (If configuration backup is available) on page 468.

If there is no back up and the system configuration must be done manually, proceed to The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) on page 476.

468 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

The Configuration Wizard (If configuration backup is available) The CXP3535 Color Server Configuration Wizard automatically appears after the installation is complete. Follow the steps of the wizard to complete the CXP3535 Color Server configuration recovery.

Select the way you want to configure the system.

If you select Restore system configuration then you will be able to restore the configuration that you backed up to an external device (see the following procedure Restoring the Backed Up Configuration).

If you select Use factory defaults then you will be able to restore the default factory-set configuration (see Restoring the Factory Defaults Configuration on page 473).

Restoring the Backed Up Configuration

Note: If you received the message Error in default configuration, click OK and go to step 2 in The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) on page 476.

The Configuration Wizard (If configuration backup is available) 469

1. Select Restore system configuration and click Next.

2. If you would like to restore the default configuration, select Default Configuration.

3. If you received the message Error in default configuration, or if you want to use a different configuration file than the default, choose Select Configuration and click Browse.

4. Locate the required configuration file and then click OK.

470 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

5. Click the Start Recovery button.

6. By default, all categories are selected. If you do not want to restore certain categories, clear the required selections.

7. Click OK.

8. Click OK.

9. In the Configuration Wizard Step 2 Recovery window, click Next.

Note: When restoring the configuration, all the custom tables/sets will be added to the system. This includes imported user-defined imposition templates, new virtual printers, downloaded fonts etc.

The Configuration Wizard (If configuration backup is available) 471

The View Configuration window appears.

10. It is recommended that you print the Configuration Server Report. The report is a useful record of the configuration settings, which you could refer to whenever required. Click the Print button.

11. Click Close.

472 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

The following window appears.

12. Click Finish. The CXP3535 Color Server Application workspace appears on your screen.

13. If you made any changes to the configuration, these changes will only take effect if the CXP3535 Color Server is shut down and then restarted. Close all open applications and from the Start menu, choose Shutdown.

14. Select Restart the Computer, click Yes, and the CXP3535 Color Server restarts. You have completed Restoring the Backed Up Configuration.

The Configuration Wizard (If configuration backup is available) 473

Restoring the Factory Defaults Configuration

1. Select Use factory defaults and click Next.

474 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

The default factory-set configuration is restored, and the View Configuration window appears.

2. It is recommended that you print the Configuration Server Report. The report is a useful record of the configuration settings, which you could refer to whenever required. Click the Print button.

3. Click Close.

The Configuration Wizard (If configuration backup is available) 475

The following window appears.

4. Click Finish. The CXP3535 Color Server Application workspace appears on your screen. You have completed Restoring the Factory Defaults Configuration.

476 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) If there is no backup configuration in your system, you need to perform the following steps to configure your system.

Choosing the Configuration Type

Verify that First Time Configuration is selected and click Next.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 477

Setting the Language

Select the required interface language and click Next.

478 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Configuring the Host Name The CXP3535 Color Server contains a default Computer Name (Hostname) preset by the factory. Check with your System Administrator in order to change the computer name.

1. Verify that the correct host name appears and click Next. Otherwise, click the Change button.

Note: The Hostname is taken from the computer name you typed during the Windows 2000 Professional Fast Installation, see Reinstalling the Operating System on page 462.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 479

The System Properties dialog box appears.

480 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

2. Click the Properties button.

3. In the Computer name field, type the new name for the computer. If you would like to change the Workgroup or the Domain in which your computer appears, type the new name in the corresponding field and click OK.

A message appears to inform you that changes will take effect only after reboot.

4. Click OK.

5. In the System Properties dialog box, click OK.

6. Click OK.

7. Click Next to continue.

Note: Do not change the Workgroup or Domain unless instructed. If you are changing the Domain / Workgroup, verify that you have the user name and password for the Domain/ Workgroup.

Note: When prompted to restart your computer, click No, (since you are be prompted at the end of the Configuration Wizard to restart your system.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 481

Setting the Date and Time

1. Check that the Date and Time are set correctly and click Next. Otherwise, click the Change button.

482 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

The Date/Time Properties dialog box appears.

2. Set the date and time correctly, and select the Time Zone tab.

3. Select the time zone required and click OK.

4. In the Date/Time Properties dialog box, click Next.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 483

Setting the Default Measurement Units

Select the default measure unit you want to use and click Next.

484 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Configuring the IP Address

1. Verify that the displayed Enable DHCP setting is correct and click Next.

2. If you wish to change the IP Address, click the Change button.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 485

The Local Area Connection 3 Properties dialog box, followed by the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box appears.

3. In Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box, select Use the following IP Address and type in the new IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway if applicable.

4. Click OK.

5. If prompted to restart your computer, click No (since you will be prompted at the end of the Configuration Wizard to restart your system).

6. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.

7. In the IP Address window, click Next to continue.

Note: The Spire Color Server is set to DHCP server configuration by default after an O/S reinstall.

For more details on how to get the IP or DHCP (also subnet mask and default gateway) information, refer to the Xerox Installation and Planning Guide.

486 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Configuring the Apple Talk Zone This option enables you to change the AppleTalk network zone in which your CXP3535 Color Server appears.

1. Verify that the displayed Apple Talk zone is correct and click Next. Otherwise, click the Change button and select the new zone.

Note: This option only applies to networks that contain Macintosh computers.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 487

The Local Area Connection 3 Properties dialog box appears, followed by the Apple Talk Protocol Properties dialog box.

2. Select the required zone from the This system will appear in zone drop-down menu, and click OK.

3. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.

4. In the Apple Talk Zone window, click Next.

488 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Completing the Configuration After the installation is complete, the View Configuration window appears.

1. It is recommended that you print the Configuration Server Report. The report is a useful record of the configuration settings, which you could refer to whenever required. Click the Print button.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 489

2. Click Close.

3. To complete the first time setup, click Finish. The configuration settings are automatically backed up. When the backup is complete, the following message appears.

4. Click OK. The CXP3535 Color Server workspace appears on your screen.

5. If you made any changes to the configuration, these changes will only take effect if the CXP3535 Color Server is shut down and then restarted. Close the CXP3535 Color Server application.

6. Close any open applications and from the Start menu select Shutdown.

490 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

7. Restart the computer. After restart, the splash window appears.

8. The CXP3535 Color Server application is automatically loaded and launched.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 491

Changing the Operator Name and Password 1. If you want to change the operator name and password:

a. On the Windows desktop, right-click My Computer and select Manage.

b. Expand the Local Users and Groups tree, and select Users.

c. Select Operator. Right-click and select Properties.

d. Type the Full name and click OK.

2. If you want to change the operator password:

a. On the Windows desktop, right-click My Computer and select Manage.

b. Expand the Local Users and Groups tree, and select Users.

c. Select Operator. Right-click and select Set Password.

d. Type the new password and confirm the new password.

e. Click OK.

3. You can now install Novell network (if required, see Installing and Configuring Novell Client for Spire on page 492), McAfee antivirus (if required, see Configuring the McAfee VirusScan on page 496), and then proceed to Importing a File and Performing a Test Print on page 503.

492 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Installing and Configuring Novell Client for Spire The following procedures are only relevant for those customers who have a Novell network running IPX protocol. If you do not have this type of network, proceed to Importing a File and Performing a Test Print on page 503.

Installing Novell Client for Spire 1. Close the Spire workspace and the Spire application.

2. Close all other applications.

3. On the Windows Start, click Start and follow the path, CXP3535>CXP3535 Tools>Novell Client Installation.

Note: Further information about configuring the connection between the CXP3535 Color Server and a Novell NDS server, in a Novell working environment, is provided in the CXP3535 Color Server Printing Guide.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 493

The following window appears.

4. Click Install.

5. Click Reboot.

6. You have completed Installing Novell Client for Spire. Proceed to Configuring Novell Client for Spire on page 494.

494 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

Configuring Novell Client for Spire 1. After the system reboots, the Novell Setup window appears.

2. Type the Tree Name. If you do not know the name, click Browse. The following window appears.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 495

3. Double-click the appropriate Tree Name. The Tree Name appears in the Novell Setup window.

4. Type the Context Name. If you do not know the name, click Browse. The following window appears.

5. Double-click the appropriate Context Name. The Context Name appears in the Novell Setup window.

6. Click OK. The Spire workspace appears.

7. You have completed Configuring Novell Client for Spire. Proceed to Importing a File and Performing a Test Print on page 503.

Uninstalling Novell Client for Spire Uninstall Novell Client for Spire if you no longer operate a Novell network running IPX protocol.

1. Close the Spire workspace and the Spire application.

2. Close all other applications.

3. Right-click My Network Places and select Properties.

496 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

4. Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties.

5. Clear the Novell for Client for Windows check box.

6. Make sure that Novell Client for Windows is selected, and click the Uninstall button.

7. Click Yes twice. The CXP3535 Color Server reboots. You have completed Uninstalling Novell Client for Spire.

Configuring the McAfee VirusScan It is highly recommended to install virus protection. The current Creo recommended virus protection software is McAfee VirusScan.

Important: Running the McAfee VirusScan could slow down the process time and effect the overall performance of the CXP3535 Color Server.

Note: It is recommended to close all applications before installing and configuring the McAfee VirusScan.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 497

After installing the McAfee VirusScan, perform the following configuration procedures.

1. Right-click the VShield icon in the Windows Taskbar and follow the path, Properties>System Scan.

2. Clear the check mark in the Outbound files check box and select the Exclusion tab.

498 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

3. Click the Add button.

4. Type D:\Output\ in the File or folder to exclude area, and click OK.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 499

The following window appears.

500 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

5. Select the Action tab.

6. In the Possible actions area, clear the check marks in the Delete File, Move File, and Exclude File check boxes.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 501

7. In the When a virus is found area, open the Prompt for user action menu, and select Clean infected files.

8. Click Apply>OK and close the System Scan Properties window.

9. Open the VirusScan console by following the path, Start>Programs>Network Associates>VirusScan Console.

502 Appendix A Reinstalling your CXP3535 Color Server

10. Double-click AutoUpdate.

11. In the Task Properties window, select the Schedule tab.

12. Select the Enable check box and in the Run area select Daily. The Start at time chosen should be after printing hours, but before the CXP3535 Color Server is powered off for the day.

13. You have completed Configuring the McAfee VirusScan.

The Configuration Wizard (if recovery fails or is unavailable) 503

Importing a File and Performing a Test Print 1. From the Job menu select Import Job.

2. Locate the ATF_A3.PS at: D:\Sample_files\Color_files\ATF Europe (A4 or A3)\ATF_A3.PS, or locate the ATF_tab.PS at: D:\Sample_files\Color_files\ATF US (Letter or Tabloid)\ATF_tab.PS.

3. Double-click on the file to add it to the list for importing.

4. Select Virtual Printer: ProcessPrint.

5. Click Submit. The file is processed, printed, and sent to the Storage Folder.

Shutting Down and Powering Off 1. In the CXP3535 Color Server workspace, from the Job menuselect

Exit. The CXP3535 Color Server workspace closes and you return to the Windows desktop.

2. To confirm that the CXP3535 Color Server application has closed, check that the Creo icon has disappeared from the desktop taskbar.

Before shutdown

After shutdown

3. In the Windows environment, select Start>Shut Down.

4. When the Windows shutdown is complete, the CXP3535 Color Server shuts down, the power LED on the front panel switches to Stand-By mode and is illuminated in orange.

Note: If the job is not printed or is waiting in the print queue, check that the finishing device is set properly in the Job Parameters window, Finishing tab.

Note: This procedure aborts jobs that are being RIPed or printed.

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

24 bit/3 byte image An image can be either RGB or CMY and each of the three colors uses 1 byte or 8 bits of data. Since 3 bytes equals 24 bits, these images are also known as 24 bit images. This system is used for high quality video imaging and scanning. For process color printing, a fourth color (black) is added for optimum effect.

32 bit/4 byte image An image that uses 8 bits each for CMYK pixels, or 8 bits for each RGB pixel and 8 pixels for a mask layer or other future use. Since 4 byte equal 32 bits, these images are also known as 32 bit images. An 8 bit CMYK image is the minimum required for high quality print reproduction.

4 color printing Color reproduction method used to create full color output by overlaying cyan, magenta, yellow and black inks.

8 bit/1 byte image An image limited to 256 tones of one color or 256 different colors. Since 1 byte contains 8 bits and each bit has two choices, 1 byte equals 28 choices or 256 possibilities.

Additive color model Color system in which the picture is composed of the combination of Red (R), Green (G) and Blue (B) light transmitted by the original subject. Effective for monitors and TV's but not for print. Scanners normally first scan in RGB and it is converted into CMYK for printing. See also RGB, CMYK, process colors, subtractive color model.

Amplitude Modulation Halftone screening, as opposed to FM screening, has dots of variable size with equal spacing between dot centers.

Anti-Aliasing A step effect in which angled lines or curved edges of elements in an electronic image look broken or jagged, as a result of producing it in a grid format. Increasing resolution can reduce this effect or using a technique called anti-aliasing where the edges are softened.

Glossary

506 CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

APR Creo's Automatic Picture Replacement workflow. In this workflow, two versions of a file are created - a high-resolution file and a low- resolution file called PSImage. The latter is used for positioning and manipulation within a DTP application. The low-resolution file is replaced automatically by the high-resolution version during the RIP process. See also PSImage.

Binding The process by which pages of a book or other publication are attached to one another.

Bit Abbreviation of binary digits. The smallest unit of information used to store information in a computer. Bits are expressed as a binary notation, that is, in ones and zeros.

Bitmap graphics An image composed of individual pixels. The color value and position of each pixel are individually described in bits and bytes of computer memory. It is called a bitmap because it is effectively a map of bits. See also Raster file.

Bleed An extra amount of printed image, which extends beyond the trim edge of the sheet or page.

Booklet VI jobs are composed of booklets, which are personalized copies of a document. A booklet can consist of several pages, but the entire document is targeted at a specific individual or address. VI jobs include elements that may differ from booklet to booklet, including text, graphics, pictures and page backgrounds.

Butt To join without overlapping or space between.

Byte A grouping of 8 bits of stored information, giving 256 levels of data. Each byte represents a value or character such as a letter or a number. In a color system, a byte can describe one out of 256 distinct shades.

CIE Abbreviation for Commission Internationale d'Eclairage. This body was created for the study of illumination problems. CIE color coordinates specify proportions of the three additive colors required to produce any hue and are used for comparative color measurement.

CMYK The process colors - Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black. See also color separations, process color, and subtractive color model.

Color gamut The range of colors possible with any color system.

Glossary 507

Color Separations Separate films are prepared for each of the process printing inks - cyan, magenta, yellow and black. These films are used to prepare the printing plates for printing on press. See also CMYK.

Composite mode In composite mode, the data required to separate a page into its CMYK components is all contained within one single (composite) file. Brisque or PS/M then separates the file into CMYK as part of the conversion process. This processing mode is the fastest and most efficient in the majority of cases. Regarding exceptions see pre- separated mode.

Creep The effect of middle pages of a folded signature extending slightly beyond outside pages, compensated by shingling. See also Shingling.

Crop To eliminate portions of an illustration or photography so the remainder is more clear, interesting or able to fit the layout.

CT Abbreviation for continuous tone. Color or black and white photographic images with tones that change gradually from dark to light (unlike the abrupt changes in linework).

DCS Abbreviation for Desktop Color Separation, an EPS format containing 5 files. Four of the files contain the color information for each of the CMYK colors and the fifth is a low-resolution composite file for use in electronic page layout. See also OPI.

Degrad A gradual blend or transition between colors. Also known as vignette or graduated blend (vector drawing).

Digital proof A black and white or color image reproduction made from digital information without producing intermediate films. It can be output as a digital hard proof using a peripheral output device or displayed as a digital soft proof on a video monitor.

Dot The individual element of a halftone.

Dot area The percentage of an area covered by halftone dots ranging from no dots at 0% to a solid ink density at 100%. The size of a single dot is stated in a percentage of the area it occupies.

508 CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

DTP Abbreviation for Desktop Publishing. The process of page production using personal computers, off-the-shelf software and an output device such as a printer or imagesetter. Usually, these components form a system that is driven by a device-independent page description language such as PostScript.

EPS Abbreviation for Encapsulated PostScript, a graphic file format used to transfer PostScript, graphic files from one program to another. It includes both a low-resolution preview and the high resolution PostScript image description. On the Macintosh, the preview is in PICT format, on the PC it is in TIFF format. Also known as EPSF.

Finishing stage Stage following the press process, which may include procedures such as laminating, perforating and varnishing.

Font A complete assortment of letters, numbers, punctuation marks, characters etc. of a given design and size.

Frame A color overlap created intentionally at a color border so as to minimize the effects of misregistration. Also known as trap or grip. See also Trapping.

Frequency modulated screens A method of creating halftones where the spots are all the same size, but the frequency or number of dot changes in a given area. There are more dots in a dark area and fewer in a light area.

Frozen job A job for which the appropriate paper stock is not available, for example, the correct paper type, paper size or paper weight.

GCR Abbreviation for Gray Component Replacement. Method for reducing the CMY amounts that produce the gray component in a color, without changing the color hue.

Graduated blend See Degrad.

Gravure printing A printing method in which the image is engraved through a screen below the surface of a cylinder. The ink is transferred to paper when pressed to the cylinder. Gravure is used for very long print runs and on many substrates.

Gray component The amounts of CMY in a color, which result in neutral gray, based on the lowest separation value of the color. See also GCR.

Grayscale A scale of gray tones from white to black. Digitally, grayscale images have up to 256 different levels of gray. See also 8 bit images.

Glossary 509

Halftone A negative or positive image whereby detail of the image is reproduced with dots varying area but of uniform density. Creates the illusion of continuous tone when viewed with the naked eye.

Highlights The whitest portions of the original or reproduction that have no color cast. The highlight dot is ranged in the reproduction from the smallest printable dot to approximately 25%. See also Midtones and Shadows.

HSL Abbreviation of Hue, Saturation and Lightness. This is a color model, which specifies a color by its wavelength (Hue), chroma or purity of the color (Saturation) and value of its brightness (Lightness).

Image area Portion of a negative or plate corresponding to inking on paper. The portion of paper on which ink appears.

Imposition The arranging of pages in a press form to ensure the correct order after the printed sheet is folded, bound and trimmed.

Ink jet proof A proof of a digital image printed by using jets that squirt minuscule drops of ink. Ink jet proofers can print onto a variety of surfaces.

Job Flow Job flow refers to the job parameter settings of selected virtual printers that are automatically applied to all jobs printed using that virtual printer. These settings determine how a sent or imported file is processed. For example, a file sent to a virtual printer with a Process & Print job flow will be RIPped, printed and stored in the Storage Folder. A file sent to a Process & Store job flow virtual printer will be RIPped and stored, without printing.

LEF A printer page orientation, where pages are delivered long edge first.

Laserwriter driver A part of the Macintosh system software which generates PostScript instructions from an application file when the Print command is activated.

Look-up table (LUT) A two or three-dimensional array of values stored for specified input- output relationships. When one input value is known, the system can automatically determine the correct output value. For example, the system can find the needed dot size for a given set of printing conditions based on the stored gray level; color setups can be saved in color tables (color transformation tables) which are one of the many kinds of LUTs.

510 CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

Linework Linework graphics are characterized by sharply defined lines and very clear transitions from one color to another. Linework is stored in the computer as a series of geometric (vector) drawing instructions.

Metamerism Metamerism occurs when two colors match under one light source, but appear different under another light source. Those two colors are called a metameric match. A metameric match might cause problems when trying to match proofs to press-sheets under different lighting conditions.

Midtones Density values of an image (original or reproduction) between the highlights and the shadows. In the reproduction, midtones are printed with dot areas between approximately 40% or 60%. See also Highlights and Shadows.

Misregistration A situation common during printing where one or more of the color separations is slightly misaligned with regard to the others on press. Misregistration shows up as white gaps or tinted overlaps at the borders of color pairs. Colors containing such files are trapped to compensate for this possibility. On Continous Tone images, misregistration can lead to blurring. See also Overprinting and Trapping.

Moir An interference pattern caused by differences in halftone screen angles or rulings. In process color printing, screen angles are selected to minimize this pattern. If the angles are not correct, a pattern that distracts the eye from the picture may be produced.

Newton's rings Small concentric circles that can appear on film when two surfaces are closed together but not in perfect contact.

OPI Abbreviation of Open Prepress Interface. A prepress convention established by Aldus Corps. OPI refers to tags or place holders in source PostScript that point to TIFF or EPS images that have not been embedded in the PostScript. These images reside in other locations and are merged with the PostScript file when processed. Normally used for performing high res/low res image substitution (alternative to Creo APR).

Output resolution The number of laser dots per unit of linear measurement (millimeter, inch etc.) on film or paper.

Glossary 511

Output tone curve A graph showing the relationship of original input densities and the corresponding dot percentages on film.

Overprint A technique, which overlaps colored elements to eliminate the appearance of gaps between elements caused by misregistration of the various separations during printing. For example, black text is normally set to overprint. See also trapping and misregistration.

PDL Printer Description Language files (for example, PostScript, PDF, EPS, VPS, VIPP). The CXP3535 Color Server processes image files in PDL formats, converting them into a suitable Ready-To-Print format for direct, high-quality printing.

PICT A Macintosh file format for bitmaps and vector graphics.

Pixels Contraction of Picture Element. The smallest element of a digital image.

PostScript A programming and page description language that has become industry standard for electronic publishing. It is used to describe the entire page, including both text graphics and images. PostScript is completely independent of the printing device. Developed by Adobe Systems, Inc.

Prepress Generic term used to describe the processes involved in preparing images for printing. Includes the input, edit and output stages.

Printer description files PPDs (PostScript Printer Definition), and PDFs (Printer Definition Files). These files are used by the Macintosh applications to prepare page and documents for specific output devices.

Process colors The four ink colors used to reproduce full color images - cyan, magenta, yellow and black.

PSImage A low-resolution EPS file used in the Creo APR workflow. This file is used for positioning in page layout. Changes made to this file will be applied to the high-resolution file, which automatically replaces it shortly before exposure. See also APR.

Quartertone The tone area of an image influencing highlight detail and with density values between the white point and midtone. Typically, printed with a dot area near 25%. See also Highlight, Midtone, Shadow.

512 CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

Raster file A file of data that was scanned, processed or output sequentially, bit by bit and line by line. Also known as a bitmap.

Rasterization The translation of vector information into bitmap information. Bitmaps may also require a new rasterization to comply with the screening parameters (dot shape, dot size) of the imagesetter that will expose them on film. See also RIP and RIPing.

Register Fitting of two or more printing images or plates in exact alignment with each other.

Register marks Crosses or other targets applied to original copy prior to printing. Used for positioning films in register or for register of two or more colors in process printing.

Resolution The number of pixels, points or dots per unit of linear measurement. For example, pixels per millimeter on a video display, number of dots per inch or millimeter on film or paper.

The resolution of an image is usually set the same vertically and horizontally. For example, a square millimeter with a resolution of 12 contains 144 pixels. The higher the resolution, the more image detail is recorded and the larger the digital file size.

RGB Abbreviation for the additive primaries Red, Green and Blue. They are used in video monitors, scanning, and other uses where the light is direct and not reflected. The component colors are the three predominant colors in the visible light spectrum detected by the human eye. Combining these 3 colors together creates white light.

RIP Abbreviation for Raster Image Processor. This is a software program or hardware device that converts vector information into pixel information to be imaged on an output file. This output file is imaged based on commands from the page description language.

RIPing The process of rastering or converting bitmaps and vector graphics into raster images suitable to the screening parameters of the output device. Files are RIPed prior to exposure or plotting.

Saturated color A color where the high and medium values approach 100%. In a saturated clean color, the values of the wanted colors are near 100% and the value of the unwanted color is near 0%. For example, when the color is red, 5% cyan, 90% magenta, 80% yellow is more saturated than 30% cyan, 90% magenta, 80% yellow.

Glossary 513

Saturation The strength of a color.

Screen angle The angle of rows of halftone dots represented in degrees. During output of films for reproduction, the dot arrangement of each separation film is placed at a distinct and different angle to the other separations. See also Moir.

Screen rulings The number of rows of printing dots per inch on a halftone film. A 150lpi-screen ruling provides much better quality than 65lpi.

SEF A printer page orientation, where pages are delivered short end first.

Shadows The darkest part of an image (original and reproduction) having densities near to maximum density. In the reproduction, shadows are printed with dot areas between 80% and 100% See also Highlights and Midtones.

Shingling A procedure that moves the image area of a page toward the direction specified, usually towards the binding, in order to compensate for creep.

Signature Sheet of printed pages which when folded becomes part of the publication.

Solid The point in the picture printed with a dot area of 100%. See also highlights, midtones and shadows.

Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometer (X-Rite DTP41), which is a 24 band color measurement instrument that reports densitometric, colorimetric and spectral data.

Spot color An additional separation (fifth, or more) that is used with special inks to achieve difficult color combinations, such as gold, or chocolate brown. Spot color is sometimes used by graphic artists to define special corporate colors, for example, for company logos. On the CXP3535 Color Server, spot colors are tanslated into CMYK values using a dictionary, that can be edited to adjust CMYK values.

Step and repeat The procedure of copying the same image by stepping it in position both horizontally and vertically according to a predetermined layout.

514 CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

Stochastic screening A method of creating frequency-modulated halftones that depends on the number of laser dots in a given area rather than the size of the laser dots in a given area. The dots are randomly placed and very small. Areas with a higher dot percent have more spots exposed in that area and those with a low dot percent have fewer spots. Stochastic screening is used to eliminate moir and improve picture detail and sharpness in high-end color printing.

Subtractive color model A color process in which the red, green and blue components of the original subject are reproduced as three super-imposed images in the complementary (subtractive) colors of cyan, magenta and yellow respectively. See also CMYK, Process colors, Additive color model.

Three quartertone Tone area of an image influencing the shadow detail and with density values between the Midtone and the Dark Point. Typically printed with a dot area near 75%.

Three quartertone Tone area of an image influencing the shadow detail and with density values between the Midtone and the Dark Point. Typically printed with a dot area near 75%.

Tone compression The reduction of the density range of an original to the density range achievable in the reproduction.

Tone reproduction curve A graph showing the density of each point of the original and its corresponding density on the reproduction.

Trapping Creating and overlap (spread) or an underlap (choke) between colors that adjoin each other to hide misregistration during printing. Trapping is sometimes referred to as spreads and chokes, or fatties and skinnies.

UCR Abbreviation of Undercolor Removal. This is a method for reducing the CMY content in neutral gray shadow areas of a reproduction and replacing them with black. As a result, the reproduction appears normal but less process color inks are used. See also GCR.

Unsaturated color A color whose highest value is less than approximately 80%. In an unsaturated, dirty color, the difference in the values of the wanted colors and the unwanted color is relatively low.

For example, when the color is red, 30% cyan, 80% magenta, 70% yellow is more unsaturated than 0% cyan, 90% magenta, 80% yellow.

Glossary 515

Variable Information (VI) Variable information (VI) jobs are jobs in which the printed materials are individualized for specific recipients or purposes. These materials can include bills, targeted advertising and direct mailings.

Vector drawing The geometric system used to define lines and curves in many computer graphics most often used for line drawings.

Vignette See Degrad.

Virtual Printer For Macintosh and PC networks, the CXP3535 Color Server provides three default network printers, known as virtual printers. Virtual printers contain preset workflows that are automatically applied to all print jobs processed with that virtual printer.

White point The whitest neutral area of an original or reproduction that contains detail and is reproduced with the smallest printable dot (typically 3% to 5%).

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

A Aborted status, 339 Aborting a running job, 329 Absolute colorimetric, 155, 236 Accounting, 440

log setup, 446 message viewer, 418 report, 446 window, 198

Actual size button, 353 Adding

crop marks, 184 exceptions, 215 fold marks, 185 inserts, 217 new virtual printer, 383

Adjusting job parameters post-RIP, 221

Admin page, 200, 238 Administration window, 374 Adobe

Acrobat, 55, 267 Distiller, 311, 315

Photoshop, 8, 254 RGB, 153

AIX, 98 Alert messages, 419 Alerts

button, 337, 450 window, 28, 140, 450

Anti-aliasing, 7, 234 Apple RGB, 153 AppleTalk

setup, 412 zone, 486

APR, 190, 238, 250, 251 editor window, 191, 253 file formats, 252 masking, 190 path, 190, 191, 253 workflow, 257

Archiving jobs, 337 VI

elements, 398

jobs, 336 ATS, 431 Auto

adjusted calibration, 281, 415 tray switching, 431

Automatic picture replacement, 190

B Back cover, 209 Backing up

calibration tables, 304 configuration, 435

Bills, 257 Black

and white printing, 152 arrows, 175 overprint, 148, 235

Bleed, 183 Blue arrows, 175 Book-finishing technique, 170 Booklets, 257, 262

tab, 350 view, 354

Brightness, 165, 236 slider, 278

Brisque jobs, 226, 317 Brochure, 256 Bypass held jobs, 425

C Cached elements, 257 Calibration, 161, 237, 281

frequency, 284 graph, 301 methods, 415 value tables, 299 window, 285 wizard, 285

CD #1, 460 CD #2, 460 Changing

date and time, 378 operator name and password, 491

CMYK emulation, 159, 237 toner availability, 24 workflow, 158, 236

Collating templates, 176 Collation, 135, 233 Color

formats, 268 management, 8 mode, 152, 233 printing, 153 tab, 152, 269 workflow, 268

ColorCalibrationDB folder, 304 Command line, 80 Complete overwrite installation, 461 Completed status, 339 Completing configuration, 472 Components pane, 123 Compression, 193 Configuration

backup, 435 completing, 475 restore, 436 wizard, 468, 476

Configuring McAfee VirusScan, 496 Novell client, 494

Conflicting template parameters, 175 trim size settings, 176

Connecting to web center, 240 Consumables tab, 24 Context, 409 Contrast, 166, 236

center, 279 slider, 278

Copying from PPD

Macintosh OS X, 81 pages from jobs, 363 PPD

from PC, 55 Creating

gradation tables, 280 PS files on PC, 46

Index

518 CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

spot colors, 310 Creep, 186 CSA (Color Space Array), 153, 158,

416 emulation, 403 profiles, 154, 403

CT, 10, 162, 307 Curling effect, 237 Cut & Stack, 170

D Data flow, 12 Default

archiving path, 421 paper size, 424 virtual printers, 13

DefaultGradTable, 269, 274 Defining a printer

Macintosh OS 9, 57 OS X, 59

Windows 2000 and ME, 38 98, 35 NT 4.0, 33 XP, 42

Deleting jobs, 331 messages, 451 pages from jobs, 361 spot colors, 311 user-defined template, 407 VI elements, 397 virtual printers, 386

Deletion policy, 139 Deliver pages

facing down, 134 up, 134

Delivery, 134 Density graph, 305 Destination

ICC profiles, 401 profile, 161, 237

Details view, 342 Device link, 158, 400, 416, 417 DFE

and printer animation, 21, 426

monitor, 21, 426 Direct mailings, 257 Disabling GCR, 164 Disk

configuration, 461 space, 371 threshold, 419, 451 usage tab, 22

Distilling a PS file, 311 Domain, 377 Dotted line, 176 Downloading

fonts, 391 remote admin application, 428 Spire PPD, 246

Downloads page, 246 DTP application, 185 DTP34L

Densitometer, 282 tutorial, 288

Duplex head to head, 131, 233 head to toe, 131, 233 printing, 136

Duplicating jobs, 335, 348

E Editing, 332

calibration tables, 298 CMYK values, 307 exceptions, 216 imposition jobs, 267 inserts, 218 pantone colors, 308 separations, 274 virtual printers, 385

Elements viewer, 397 Embedded

CSA profile, 159 RGB profile, 156

Emulate RGB, 417 source paper tint, 237

Emulation methods, 417 predefined profiles, 159

Enabling web connections, 430 Enlarging size of job pages, 137

EPS, 10 Even

booklets, 130 pages, 129

Exceptions, 215 for imposed jobs, 214 tab, 214

Exporting accounting information, 446 as InSite, 348 as PDF2Go, 314

F Face

down, 134, 233 up, 134, 233

FAF, 7, 234 Failed status, 339 File formats, 10 Filtering

information by date, 444 messages, 456 storage folder, 340

Finisher, 212 module, 239 tab, 24

Finishing tab, 200 First page button, 353 Fit to page button, 353 Fit to paper, 137 Font list, 387 Fontdownloader, 32, 386, 391 Fonts, 386 Formatting image disks, 372 Frame thickness, 147 Free disk space, 266, 371, 372 Front cover, 206 Frozen job, 143, 320

G Gallop, 138, 258, 265 Gamma, 154 GAP (Graphic art port), 10, 226, 315

file structure, 316 files, 316

GCR, 163, 237 General setup, 375

Index 519

Gradation end, 278 graph, 275 highlight, 276 mid point, 277 shadow, 277 tool, 269 window, 269

Gradations, 167 Grayscale, 233

images, 232 printing, 152

Green arrows, 174

H Held

jobs, 425 status, 339

High-resolution utility, 396 workflow, 250

Hostname, 478 Hot folder, 224, 225

file formats, 226 Macintosh

O/S 9, 228 O/S X, 229

PC, 226 HTH, 233 HTT, 233

I ICC profiles, 399 Ignoring overprint information, 150 Image

disk, 371 noise, 150, 234 position, 135 quality, 146, 234 scale, 137

Importing files, 122 GAP files, 315 source ICC profiles, 400 user-defined imposition

templates, 406 Imposed sheet view, 357 Imposition, 7

settings, 351 tab, 168, 266 VI jobs, 264 workflow, 266

Improving image quality, 146 In Print queue, 320, 323 In Process queue, 188, 320, 322 In Storage pane, 334 Initial creep out, 187 Ink saving, 163, 237 Inline elements, 263 Inserts, 215, 217 InSite, 348 Installing Novell client, 492 Interface language, 379 Interleaves, 143 Internet Explorer, 240 IPX

parameter, 114 printing, 114, 409

J Jagged edges, 7 Job

accounting, 440 batching, 326, 425 deleting, 331 deletion, 188, 238 editor

buttons, 353 tabs, 350

flow, 192, 238 history, 452

window, 194 info, 198 parameters, 264

window, 126, 198, 267 preview & editor, 349 thumbnail, 26 ticket report, 368

K Kanji fonts, 390 key job components, 194

L Landscape, 131

Large icons view, 343 Last page button, 353 Last-minute

adjustments, 166 color corrections, 152

Lead edge, 136 LEF, 141 Links page, 247 Linux

command line, 94 user interface, 95

List view, 344 LPR printer

Macintosh OS X, 81 Windows

2000/XP, 72 NT 4.0, 65

LUT, 237 LW, 10, 162, 307

M Macintosh, 224 Managing

disk space, 370 fonts, 391

Manual duplex, 132, 233 Margins, 185 Marks, 184 Max details button, 353 McAfee VirusScan, 496 Media type, 142, 233 Menu bar, 20 Merging jobs, 361 Message viewer, 454 Messages, 21 Method, 169 Minimum

gutter size, 186 margin size, 186

Misregistration, 148, 234 Missing job components, 194 Monitoring jobs, 241 Moving

pages within a job, 359 waiting jobs to storage, 330

N Navigation buttons, 353

520 CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

NDS, 99 NetWare administrator application,

100 Network

printers, 13 setup, 408 tab, 22

Next page button, 353 Normal LUT, 286 Novell, 99

client, 117, 492 installing print drivers, 116 PConsole, 114 print

queues, 104 server, 102

printer, 103 Number of copies, 128

O Odd

booklets, 130 pages, 129

Operation mode, 21 OPI (Open Prepress Interface), 252,

422 file formats, 252

Orientation, 172 Original CMYK values, 159 Override PPD parameters, 384

P Pantone colors, 307 Paper

size, 140 stock tab, 23, 140 tint, 159, 237

Pathways panel, 25 PDF, 10, 226

optimization, 311, 422 workflow, 311

PDF2Go, 314 PDL, 224 Perceptual (photographic), 156, 236 Perfect bound, 171 Personalized copies, 257 Photoshop, 8

Pop-up messages, 458 Portrait jobs, 131 Power

off, 29 up, 16

PowerPoint, 232 PPD parameters, 232 PPML, 10, 260 Predefined imposition templates, 178 Preferences utilities, 413 Preflight, 194

report, 194 PrePress files, 315 Pre-RIP

editing, 6 preview, 420

Preservation installation, 461 Preserving

pure CMYK, 416 colors, 417

Preview buttons, 353 Previewing and editing PDL jobs, 367 Previous page button, 353 Prinergy jobs, 226 Print

grays using only black toner, 152 method, 131, 233 order, 133, 233 quality tab, 144, 255 queue

manager, 425 policies, 425

range, 129 for VI, 130

settings tab, 128, 265 Printer

disk, 371 monitor, 23 operation mode, 21 resources, 23 status, 21

Printers default, 56, 232 Printing

booklets, 130 book-style hard copies, 131 brochures using APR, 256 from

any application, 224

client workstations, 224 CXP3535 Color Server, 122 Linux, 94 Macintosh, 63 PC, 55 UNIX, 98, 225

from Macintosh, 63 manual duplex, 132 on tabs, 218 single-sided pages, 131 tabs, 219 through a hot folder, 226 VI job, 259 with APR or OPI, 255

ProcessPrint, 13, 192, 238, 382 ProcessStore, 13, 192, 238, 383 Product overview, 4 Profile manager, 399 Proofing, 348 Protecting small text, 147 PS (PostScript)

files, 261 Image Exporter, 254 overprint, 149, 235

Pure colors, 417

Q QuarkXPress, 8, 252, 308 Queue

manager, 25, 320 resuming, 328 suspending, 328

R Rasterized Brisque jobs, 317 Realistic images, 156 Rear edge, 136 Red corners, 175 Reducing the size of the job pages, 137 Reinstalling

Creo application, 464 methods, 461 operating system, 462

Relative colorimetric, 154, 236 Remote

admin, 426 admin client, 428

Index 521

tools setup, 426 Removing

exceptions, 216 inserts, 218

Renaming user-defined template, 407

Rendering intent, 153, 154, 156, 158 CMYK, 237 RGB, 236

Reordering columns, 442, 455 jobs in queues, 327

Repeated elements, 311 Reprinting files, 124 Re-RIPing, 221 Resizing columns, 346, 443, 455 Resource manager, 382 Restoring

configuration, 436 from backup, 468

factory defaults configuration, 473

Retrieving jobs, 338 VI

elements, 398 jobs, 336

Re-usable elements, 262 RGB, 232, 416

workflow, 153, 236 RIP, 4, 7 Rotate 180, 138, 239 RTP, 4, 6

job editor window, 267 jobs, 269, 359

Running job, 320

icon, 322

S Saddle stitch, 170

jobs, 186 Saturated

LUT, 286 presentation, 155, 236

Saving existing calibration table, 303 new calibration table, 303

Scan back, 317 Screening method, 162, 238 SEF, 141 Separation

field, 274 list, 299

Services tab, 188, 252 Setting

high resolution path, 253 LPR printer Macintosh

OS 9, 86 OS X, 84

trapping, 148 Show info button, 351 Shut down, 29 Simplex, 131, 233 Simulating VI structure, 199 Size, 172 Slip sheet, 203, 238 Small icons view, 343 Software, 6, 460 Source

CSA profile, 156 ICC profiles, 400

Spine trim size, 185 Spire

icon, 29 over TCP/IP, 88 web center, 430

SpireNormal, 286 SpireSaturated, 286 Split to booklets, 199, 239 SpoolStore, 13, 192, 238, 383 Spot color, 307

dictionary, 414 editor, 307

Staple options, 239 Start menu, 16 Status

icons, 322, 323 imported jobs, 123 panel, 21

information, 325, 334 Step & Repeat, 170, 264 Storage folder, 13, 27, 126, 188, 267,

332, 334, 452 Submitting

jobs, 335 RTP jobs, 125

Substitute fonts, 189 Superior text quality, 145 Suspend / resume switch, 328 Switching view modes, 341 SWOP, 237 Synapse, 348 System partition overwrite, 461

T Tabs, 219 Target calibration, 281, 415 TCP/IP setup, 411 Template, 173 Test

page, 17, 381 print, 503

Text / Line quality, 144, 234 Thumbnail, 370

arrows, 174 viewer, 174 window, 370

Thumbnails tab, 351 view, 355

Total creep in, 187 Transparency, 142

interleave, 239 Trapping, 7, 147, 234 Tray, 143 Tree, 409 Trim size, 172

U Uninstalling Novell client, 495 Unit of measurement, 380 UNIX, 224 User

defined imposition template, 406 disk, 371

Using overprint information, 150 PPD, 232 printer calibration wizard, 288 source CSA, 156 Spire source CSA, 156

Utilities, 432 folder, 8, 246

522 CXP3535 Color Server User Guide

V Value table, 299 VI (Variable Information), 8, 199,

397 document formats, 259 elements, 336

folder, 258 workflow, 257

Viewing accounting information, 440 configuration, 432 crop marks, 357 imposed jobs, 357 job

history, 332 parameters, 332 thumbnail, 370

pages, 354 separations, 302

VIPP, 10, 260 Virtual printer, 32, 225, 382

tab, 23 VPS, 10, 262

W Waiting job, 320

icon, 322 Waste toner container, 24 Web

center, 240 connect, 430 viewer, 241

alerts tab, 244 printer tab, 245 queues tab, 242 storage tab, 243

Workflow, 10 extenders, 8

Workgroup, 377 Workspace, 19

X X-Rite, 282

calibrating, 284 configuring, 283 connecting, 283

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Creo Xerox works, you can view and download the Xerox Creo CXP3535 Server User Guide on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User Guide for Xerox Creo as well as other Xerox manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a Xerox Creo. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Xerox Creo CXP3535 Server User Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Xerox Creo CXP3535 Server User Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Xerox Creo CXP3535 Server User Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Xerox Creo CXP3535 Server User Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Xerox Creo CXP3535 Server User Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.